Home

TigerSwitch 10G

1. Bock aaa Figure 3 29 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3 65 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign itto a group Console config Hsnmp server user mark r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 166 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 168 No user exist SNMP remote user Engineld 12345abcdef0 User Name mark Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes Group Name The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters e Model The group security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range
2. 00000 4 247 bridge extigvip dad Gee athe Gs ANE La wha alent 4 247 show priloge ext citas cat aa 4 248 SWItChpOLt Qvi ps het see each Reed Windia Oa woe DR usb 4 249 show gvtp configuration 6 0 66 cee eee eee 4 249 Garp UM et ns ta niet seine athe Aint cage A a Sai gay 4 250 show garp HUME asia in 4 251 Phorty Commands sy A A a a oo int 4 252 Priority Commands Layer 2 0 eee eee 4 252 CUE modes en ARG Se E Seca tae 4 253 switchport priority default ooooo ooooommmm o 4 254 queue bandwidth snae 0 cece ooo 4 255 Gueue cos Mapi E a 4 256 show queue MOE A oe ese 4 257 show queue bandwidth 0 0 00 cee eee eee 4 258 TABLE OF CONTENTS show queue COS Map ooooocococoocococccc eee 4 258 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 1 2 eee eee 4 259 map ip port Global Configuration 4 259 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 260 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 261 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 261 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 262 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 263 show Mapp Pott iss Add tiene deal gens cae a 4 264 show map ip precedence 6 6 eee eee eee 4 265 show mapip dsep india atthe aaa edit 4 266 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 0 cee cece eee 4 267 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 eee eee eee 4 268 ip igmp snooping 6 6 eee eee
3. 4 217 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 0 for auto configuration or 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 e Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority 4 218 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS e When the spanning tree pathcost method
4. Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP 4 119 UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses 4 137 packet format and Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs 4 149 assigned to each port IP ACLs Table 4 34 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters GC 4 120 configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs access list ip Automatically creates extra masks to GC 4 120 extended support fragmented ACL entries fragment auto m ask permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source STD ACL 4 122 IP address permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified EXT ACL 4 123 criteria including source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code show ip Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 126 access list access list ip Changes to the IP Mask mode used to GC 4 126 mask precedence configure access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules IP Mask 4 128 4 119 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 34 IP ACL Commands Continued show access list Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for PE 4 131 ip IP ACLs mask precedence ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 132 show ip Sho
5. Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disab nstance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method Eth 1 1 information Admin status Role State External admin path cost Internal admin cost External oper path cost Internal oper path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status MSTP le enable 0 1 4094 32768 2 20 E 15 2 20 5 20 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 10000 sec 22 3 ong enable root forwarding 0000 0000 0000 0000 28 200000 28 24 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 32768 0 0030F1552000 disable enable disable auto point to point enable VLAN COMMANDS show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information Configuration name Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Conso
6. Host IP Address Current New Host IP List none lt lt Add Host IP Address Remove Figure 3 17 Remote Logs 3 42 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 10 1 0 9 4 61 Console config logging facility 23 4 62 Console config logging trap 4 4 63 Console config logging trap Console config exit Console show logging trap 4 64 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Disabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 10 1 0 9 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 Console Displaying Log Messages Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number Information VLAN 1 link up notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number1 Informaton STA topology change notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 tunctons 1 error number1 Information Unit 1 Port 21 link up
7. SNMPv3 Views i O Read View C defaultview y A ce Write View C defaultview y ar e Notify View O defaultview y Book Aaa Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 3 71 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Console config Hsnmp server group secure users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview 4 163 Console config exit Console show snmp group 4 164 Group Name secure users Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View defaultview Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views ate used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string e Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excl
8. Trunk ID 1 LACP System Priority I 32768 LACP Port Priority j 32768 Admin Key __ 3 Oper Key 3 LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State gt Defaulted Y Oper State Defaulted Admin Stato Distrbitirg Oper State Disinbuting A Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting 2 Admin State Syneheonizaion Oper State e iaa E Admin State Aggregation Y Oper State Aggregation y Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Y Oper State LACP Activity 2 Figure 3 57 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 194 Port channel 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 3 138 PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an lin k ageregation Table 3 10 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID
9. o oooooooooomomoo 3 191 VLAN Static List Creating VLANs o ooo 3 193 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members 3 195 VLAN Static Membership by Port 3 196 VLAN Port Configuration ooooccccocooonomm 3 199 Private VEAN Status act yi ed th di 3 201 Private VLAN Link Status 0 00 0 000005 3 201 Protocol VLAN Configuration ooooocooomom 3 203 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration o oooo o 3 205 Default Port Priority dev cb alot printed BN deed a 3 207 Traffic Classes ri ii eae 3 209 Queue Mode ios o o a eS 3 210 Queue Schedulino tata hi tad baja 3 211 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status 3 213 IP Precedence Priority sx irera eigi 0 00 eee 3 214 EP DSCP Phority iui occu did du a BS oa ah dal 3 216 IP Port Priority Status 0 eee ee eee eee 3 218 EP Rott Photity LR Al Ah all 3 218 ACL COS PHOfty rassa Tiida aia da 3 220 IGMP Configuration s siao i 0 3 225 Multicast Router Port Information 3 226 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration 3 228 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 229 Specifying Multicast Port Membership 3 230 DNS General Configuration ooooooccocommo 3 233 DNS Static Host Table o oooooooomomoo 3 235 PNS Cache iniciada 3 237 xxvii FIGURES xxviii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a
10. p_address YP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 60 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or highe
11. Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned 3 107 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 108 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit Address Type iP 7 IP Address 16832160 Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 Aas Figure 3 44 ACL Configuration Standard IP CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and ano
12. Enables SNMP on the switch Web Click SNMP Agent Status Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox and click Apply SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status Vv Enabled Figure 3 23 Enabling the SNMP Agent CLI The following example enables SNMP on the switch Console config snmp server 4 151 Console config Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability The switch supports up to five community strings e Current Displays a list of the community strings currently configured 3 53 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 54 Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only private read write Range 1 32 characters case sensitive e Access Mode Specifies the access rights for the community string Read Only Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access ri
13. Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 4 15 Console config line tlogin local 4 16 Console config line tpassword 0 secret 4 17 Console config line tttimeout login response 0 4 18 Console config line exec timeout 0 4 19 Console config line password thresh 5 4 20 Console config line silent time 60 4 21 Console config line tdatabits 8 4 22 Console config line parity none 4 23 Console config line speed auto 4 23 Console config line stopbits 1 4 24 Console config line end Console show line console 4 25 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Console Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access v a Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch
14. IP Address 2 IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Address 6 IP Address 7 IP Address 8 aca Figure 3 100 DNS Static Host Table 3 235 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Console config ttip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 285 Console config tip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts 4 291 Hostname rd5 Inet address T10 1 0 55 192 768 1555 Alias 1 rd6 Console Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable e Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP TheIP address associated with this record e TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record 3 236 CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE Web Select DNS Cache Cache No Flag Type IP TTL Domain 0 4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net
15. 0 eee eee eee 3 217 TABLE OF CONTENTS Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 1 0 0 0 000 00 cee 3 219 Miuilticast Pilteting ear ida Hayne Said Saget Medic a Meats 3 221 IGMP Protocol a eee eed ad a 3 222 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 0 000005 3 222 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 223 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 226 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 227 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 228 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services oooo o 3 229 Configuring Domain Name Service 1 6 6 cece eee 3 231 Configuring General DNS Service Parameters 3 231 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 234 Displaying the DNS Cache 00 00 3 236 Command Line Interface o ooooooooom o o 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 0 cee eee 4 1 Accessing the CLD shies vast acai ib 4 1 Console Connection tt e aa 4 1 Telnet Connections pata ds 4 2 Entering Commands lg eas Yi 4 4 Keywords and Arguments 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee 4 4 Minimum Abbreviation oooooooococcocnooonccccoo ooo 4 4 Command Completions icc ee a a 4 5 Getting Help on Commands 0 06 e eee 4 5 Showing Commands 0 6 o 4 6 Partial Keyword Lookup 0006s 4 7 Negating the Effect of Commands 0 0000008 4 7 Using Command History 0 eee eee 4 7 Understanding Com
16. 29 The settings for this parameter cannot be changed 4 171 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 9 to 100 Mbps full duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 9 config if speed duplex 100full config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 172 capabilities 4 173 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting e Disabled for Ports 1 8 Enabled for Port 9 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 30 The settings for this parameter cannot be changed 4 172 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex a
17. Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values a MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 y Oper STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Path Oper Trunk Port Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Cost Link Type Kage Pont Role Member 1 Discarding 2 10000 32768 0 0030F1047340 128 1 10000 Foe Disabled Disabled 2 Discarding 12 10000 32768 0 0030F1047340 128 2 100000 ro Disabled Designated 3 Discarding 0 10000 32768 0 0030F1047340 128 3 10000 Popa Disabled Disabled 4 Discarding 9 10000 32768 0 0030F10473A0 128 4 100000 pics Disabled Designated 5 Discarding 0 10000 32768 0 0030F1047340 128 5 10000 Pointto Disabled Disabled y jste TA y E Point is x Figure 3 71 MSTP Port Information 3 180 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 158 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 226 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled Instance 0 VLANs configuration 2 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 5 Root Hello Time sec
18. Command Usage Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections 4 18 LINE COMMANDS e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting 4 19 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh This command sets the password intrusion
19. Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 137 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Interface Port 2
20. Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0000ABCD0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCD0000 Root Port i Max Age 20 Root Path Cost o Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 115 Last Topology Change 0 d 0 h O min 35 s Figure 3 66 STA Information 3 161 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable nstance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port 1 Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes ak Last topology changes time sec 13380 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External admin path cost 1000 Internal admin cost 1000 External oper path cost
21. System ID Partner Oper LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol System ID Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 4 197 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Console show lacp sysid Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 Console Table 4 52 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC System MAC address Address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form
22. Table 4 38 ACL Information Commands Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 149 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 149 This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the uset defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 15 0 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive 4 149 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple 4 150 Network Management Prot
23. Table 4 5 Line Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 23 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 23 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted LC 4 24 per byte disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 25 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE 4 25 PE These commands only apply to the serial port This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as VTY in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections 4 15 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE login 4 16 Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config tline console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 25 show users 4 84 This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a passwotd Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authent
24. name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 clients Table 4 15 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 50 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the GC 4 51 SSH setver ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed bya GC 4 52 authentication re client tries ip ssh server key Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 52 size copy tftp Copies the user s public key from a TFTP PE 4 87 public key server to the switch delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 53 ip ssh crypto Generates the host key PE 4 53 host key generate ip ssh crypto Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 54 zeroize ip ssh save Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 55 host key disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 25 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the PE 4 56 configured values for authentication timeout and retries 4 47
25. on page 3 146 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable Stats Octets Input 229516 Octets Output 464876 Unicast Input 51 Unicast Output 64 Discard Input 0 Discard Output 0 Error Input 0 Error Output 0 Unknown Protos Input 0 QLen Output 0 Extended Iftable Stats Multi cast Input 3362 Multi cast Output 3384 Broadcast Input 55 Broadcast Output 6 Ether like Stats Alignment Errors 0 FCS Errors 0 Single Collision Frames 0 Multiple Collision Frames 0 SQE Test Errors 0 Deferred Transmissions 0 Late Collisions 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Internal Mac Transmit Errors 0 Internal Mac Receive Errors 0 Frames Too Long 0 Carrier Sense Errors 0 Symbol Errors 0 RMON Stats Drop Events 0 Octets 694392 Packets 6924 Broadcast PKTS 61 Multi cast PKTS 6748 Undersize PKTS 0 Oversize PKTS 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC Align Errors 1 Collisions 0 Packet Size lt 64 Octets 3449 Packet Size 65 to 127 Octets 3419 Packet Size 128 to 255 Octets 9 Packet Size 256 to 511 Octets 5 Packet Size 512 to 1023 Octets 12 Packet Size 1024 to 1518 Octets 30 Console 4 179 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 por
26. Default 23 Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout 3 36 BASIC CONFIGURATION interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Teln
27. Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 4 133 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule e A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see queue cos map on page 4 256 Table 4 35 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 256 show map access list ip 4 134 show map access list ip This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface he CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list ip terface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 134 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console show map access list ip Access list to COS of Eth 1 4 Access list ALS1 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list ip 4 133 match access list ip This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined ACL
28. Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames 3 197 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Ifingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLAWNs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port Ifingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 18 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled GARP Join Timer 8 The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate ina VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll m
29. SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 53 ip ssh save host key 4 55 no ip ssh server 4 50 ip ssh save host key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 53 4 55 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console
30. Trunk ID 1 LACPDUs Sent Marker Sent Marker Unknown Pkts 19 LACPDUS Receive 10 D Marker Receive 0 O Marker Illegal Pkts 0 Figure 3 56 LACP Port Counters Information 3 135 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters 4 194 Port channel 1 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Sent 19 LACPDUs Receive 10 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the ocal side of an link aggregation Table 3 9 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority 3 136 PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 9 LACP Internal Configuration Information Continued Field Description LACP Port LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel Priority group Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state
31. VLAN CONFIGURATION Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANSs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP click Apply GVRP Status GVRP M Enable Figure 3 73 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 247 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes e VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch 17 Web Only 3 189 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 256 Figure 3 74 VLAN Basic
32. ame name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 e access level leve Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in e 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec pas
33. e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host key pair 1 e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type e rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs 4 53 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory e Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 54 ip ssh save host key 4 55 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 54
34. indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN T 2241112 Unit Port pasce feont El VLAN ID 1 y lt Add Multicast IP Remove Unit 1 Port 1 Trunk 1 Figure 3 98 Specifying Multicast Port Membership 3 230 CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 1 4 269 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 271 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 1 USER J 224 1 2 3 Eth1 1 IGMP Console Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one of mote na
35. none Community read string only write v1 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v2c noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community read only string only v2c noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview none Community read string only write v2c noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v3 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only 3 51 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Table 3 4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Continued Model v3 Level AuthNoPriv Group user defined Read View user defined Write View user defined Notify View user defined Security Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms v3 AuthPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES 56 bit encryption Note The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the 3 52 system You can then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Enabling the SNMP Agent Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients 1 e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status
36. radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_por timeout meou retransmit retransmil key e index Allows you to specify up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires host_ip_address IP address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting e auth port 1812 e timeout 5 seconds e retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config 4 98 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radi
37. sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 192 1681 55 T 0 1055 Console Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 234 You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entty Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias 10 1 0 55 rd6 Delete Edit 192 168 1 55 _Delet Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1
38. 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name readaccess Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console User Authentication 3 74 You can restrict management access to this switch and provide secure network access using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure management access rights for users Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports e 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports USER AUTHENTICATION IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admi
39. 1 64 characters 3 66 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Write View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMP02 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered 3 67 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object
40. 1000 Internal oper path cost 1000 Priority 128 Designated cost 300000 Designated port 128 1 32768 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0030F1D473A0 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 0 Designated root Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 3 162 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol 4 Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 4 RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using
41. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 48 Table 4 15 Secure Shell Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 56 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or PE 4 57 for the host show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and PE 4 84 public key type The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 95 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public
42. Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto 4 23 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration 4 24 LINE COMMANDS Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line Hstopbits 2 Console config line disconnect This command terminates an SSH Te
43. Duplex F Fa0h FE E F Enabled rociar Enabled FE 10h E 100h F1000h F 10Gh Admin Autonegotiation Faor Faoor m 1000f M 10Gf IT Enabled I 10h IM 100h M 1000h M 10Gh ToGtull gt Rl Enabled 1004 10f MH 100f m 1000F M 106F Enabled 10h M 100h M 1000h M 10Gh 10Gf Ni i a 10Giul mor mior miooo mior one IE Enabled I 10h FT 100h F 1000h F 10Gh 4 F 10G gt None oa TM 10f moor 1710001 one FT 106f F Enabled I 10h TT 100h I 1000h I 10Gh TG Nore 5 M Enabled 10Ghul E tof moor miooo m 10c oe 2 Figure 3 52 Port Port Configuration CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 8 4 170 Console config if description RD SW 8 4 170 Console config if shutdown 4 174 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 172 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 171 Console config if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 173 Console config if Htcapabilities 100full 3 126 PORT CONFIGURATION Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two switches You can create up to four trunks The switch supports both static trunking
44. Figure 3 6 IP Interface Configuration Manual CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 170 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 253 255 255 255 0 4 279 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 4 280 Console config Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN Ta IP Address Mode DHCP z IP Address forces Subnet Mask 2552552550 Gateway IP Address i0 10254 MAC Address 00 0C DB 21 11 33 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 IP Interface Configuration DHCP Note If you lose your management connection make a console connection to the switch and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart client command Console config Console config interfac
45. File information is shown below Table 4 26 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes 4 91 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir File name File type Startup Size byte Unitl SMC8708L2_ Diag _v3006 bix Boot Rom Image Y 1164420 SMC8708L2 Runtime v3 0 0 4 bix Operation Code Y 3154548 Factory Default_Config cfg Config File N 455 startupl cfg Config File Y 1584 Total free space 29476544 whichboot 4 92 This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot File name File type Startup Size byte Unit1 SMC8708L2_Diag_v3006 bix Boot Rom Image Y 1164420 SMC8708L2_Runtime_v3 0 0 4 bix Operation Code Y 3154548 startupl cfg Config File Y 1584 Console FLasH FiLE COMMANDS boot system This command specifies the file or image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of
46. HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 120 4 125 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL e extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 15 0 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 122 ip access group 4 132 access list ip mask precedence This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration 4 126 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Usag
47. Rx EXPOL Start DIRx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff DiRx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOL5re 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total D Tx EAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Resp ld O Tx EAP Req ld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 41 802 1X Port Statistics CLI This example displays the dot1x statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 113 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console 3 102 USER AUTHENTICATION Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses Ifanyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of address
48. S Commands These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one of more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 4 73 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address mapping GC 4 285 clear host Deletes entries from the host name to address PE 4 286 table ip domain name Defines a default domain name for incomplete GC 4 287 host names ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for GC 4 288 incomplete host names ip name server Specifies the address of one or more name GC 4 289 servers to use for host name to address translation DNS COMMANDS Table 4 73 DNS Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page ip Enables DNS based host name to address GC 4 290 domain lookup translation show hosts Displays the static host name to address PE 4 291 mapping table show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 4 292 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 4 292 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE
49. and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets 4 159 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 4 155 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID In other words the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 166 Example Console config snmp server engine id local 12345 Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 155 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID
50. and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA Version 2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default Both The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM Le volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair e Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page e Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile memory Flash 3 87 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 88 Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Ho
51. bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames he total number of good frames received that were CRC Alignment Errors T directed to this multicast address T he number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 3 149 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 150 Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and t
52. before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before disabling LACP If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically A trunk formed with another switch active links dynamical enabled configured members backup link using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu see page 3 128 Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Unit Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Port Port identifier Range 1 8 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unitl Portl Unitl Port2 Unitl Port3 Unitl Porta lt lt Add Port fi ee a Figure 3 54 LACP Trunk Configuration CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a tr
53. deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows ADS 7 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Masks for Access Control Lists You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny the rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress 4 118 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Table 4 33 Access Control List Commands
54. interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config 1f 4 190 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp factor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed 1 e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established
55. key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461732531 3674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301 196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839 71752646358058176716709574804776117 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4 36 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921 143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317 81366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938006090253948 40848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150 45306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server
56. lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 193 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sys id e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 4 e counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages internal Configuration settings and
57. o ooooooommm 3 128 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports oooooo ooo o 3 130 Configuring LACP Parameters 0 0 00048 3 132 Displaying LACP Port Counters ooooooccoooooo 3 135 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3 136 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3 139 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds oooo o ooooo o 3 141 Configuring Port Mirroring 0 cee eee eee 3 143 Configuring Rate Limits o ooooooooooooccooommoo 3 145 Showing Port Statistics 6 6 eee eee 3 146 Addt ssTableSettings tritio del a dd Aten edt hos 3 152 Setting Static Addresses 10 6 cee cece eee 3 153 Displaying the Address Table 0 0 0 0 00 c cece ee 3 154 Changing the Aging Time 0 cee eee eee eee 3 156 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration oooooccccooommmo 3 156 Displaying Global Settings 0 eee eee 3 158 Configuring Global Settings 0 eee eee 3 163 Displaying Interface Settings oooooooccccocoommmoo 3 168 Configuring Interface Settings 0 ee eee eee 3 172 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees ooooooooooooo 3 176 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3 180 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3 182 VLAN Configuration eene aa cece cece 3 184 TREE 802 10 MEANS eros ala lS dd Sade cede Sh 3 184 Assigning Ports to VLANS 006 3 185 Forw
58. port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 a vlan2 Console 4 246 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 61 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP elobally for the switch GC 4 247 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension PE 4 248 configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 249 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs foran IC 4 238 vlan interface show gvrp Displays GVRP configuration for the NE PE 4 249 configuration selected interface garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected IC 4 250 function show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected NE PE 4 251 function bridge ext
59. possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination MAC Bit Mask Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4094 VID Bit Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4094 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 PX Ethernet Type Bit Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex 3 111 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 112 e Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 2
60. show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 266 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o o Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 262 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 263 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 68 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or 4 268 static assignment sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast 4 272 filtering at Layer 2 Static Multica
61. spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 210 priority spanning tree Configures the path cost method for GC 4 211 path cost method RSTP MSTP spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for GC 4 212 transmission limit RSTP MSTP spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 212 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 213 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree MST 4 214 instance name Configures the name for the multiple MST 4 215 spanning tree revision Configures the revision number for the MST 4 216 multiple spanning tree max hops Configures the maximum number of MST 4 216 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Table 4 54 Spanning Tree Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 217 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of IC 4 218 an interface spanning tree Configures the spanning tree priority of IC 4 219 port priority an interface spanning tree Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 220 edge port spanning tree Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 221 portfast spanning tree Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP IC 4 222 link type spanning tree mst Configures the path cost of an instance in IC 4 223 cost the MST spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in IC 4 224 por
62. type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart client to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt BASIC CONFIGURATION 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as SMC EliteView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers wi
63. 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps Private Traps swPowerStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the power ChangeTrap 76 2 1 0 1 state changes swFanFailureT rap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the fan fails 76 2 1 0 17 swFanRecoverTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the fan failure 76 2 1 0 18 has recovered swlpFilterRejectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when an incorrect 76 2 1 0 40 IP address is rejected by the IP Filter swSmtpConnFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is triggered if the SMTP Trap 76 2 1 0 41 system cannot open a connection to the mail server successfully swMainBoardVer 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the slave MismatchNotificaiton 76 2 1 0 56 board version is mismatched with the master board version This trap binds two objects the first object indicates the master version whereas the second represents the slave version swModuleVer 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the slide in MismatchNotificaiton 76 2 1 0 57 module version is mismatched with the main board version swThermalRising 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the Notification 76 2 1 0 58 temperature exceeds the switchThermalActionRisingThresh old 3 69 CONFIGURI
64. 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 Imsn com tw 7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn corn tw a f4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 iglobal msads net x Figure 3 101 DNS Cache CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache 4 292 NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 4 ALTAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 8 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net Console 3 237 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 238 CHAPTER 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Acc
65. 129 LACP Trunk Configuration ooooococcccoooo 3 131 LACP Aggregation Port 0 0 3 133 LACP Port Counters Information 3 135 LACP Port Internal Information 3 138 LACP Port Neighbors Information 3 140 Port Broadcast Control oooooooooomomomm oo 3 142 Mirror Port Configuration 0 0 0 c cece 3 144 Rate Limit Configuration 0 000000 e ee 3 145 Port Statistics caia tet date eee 3 151 Static Addresses ito a adi 3 154 Dynamic Addresses oooococococoooooooccccco 3 155 Address A CIO occas ete wade se ate EE ee Ate 3 156 STA Information se saae ri ia e ccc ce eee 3 161 STA Global Configuration 00 3 167 STA Port Information 0 0 serrr nren 3 172 STA Port Configuration 0 0 0 cece 3 175 MSTP VLAN Configuration oooocccccoconooo 3 178 MSTP Port Information 0 0 0 0c cece 3 180 MSTP Port Configuration 0 0000 rroo 3 184 Globally Enabling GVRP 00000 3 189 VLAN Basic Information 0 00000 c eee ee 3 190 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 FIGURES VLAN Current Table
66. 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console config Console config authentication login tacacs 4 95 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 102 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 103 Console config tacacs server key green 4 103 Console config exit Console show tacacs server 4 104 Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server Server port number 200 Console Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access 1 e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port 3 81 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 82 If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and
67. 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console 4 291 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS service Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 95 101 055 Console show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE o 4 CNAME ay 4 CNAME 2 4 CNAME 3 4 CNAME 4 4 CNAME 5 4 CNAME 6 4 CNAME 7 4 CNAME 8 4 ALIAS Console IP 10 10 66 66 66 66 66 66 2 44 96 2 44 3 218 218 218 218 218 218 71 71 TL 71 TAs TL 84 83 81 80 89 86 POINTER TO 7 TTL 893 898 298 298 298 298 298 298 298 DOMAIN pttch_pc accton com tw ahten accton com tw www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo akadns net www yahoo com 4 292 DNS COMMANDS Table 4 74 show dns cache display description Field Description NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple d
68. 193 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any 3 194 VLAN awate devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 196 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 197 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Range 1 8 Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN
69. 4 222 spanning tree Mst COSt 2 eee eee 4 223 spanning tree mst port priority 2 6 6 eee eee eee 4 224 spanning tree protocol migration 0 0 c eee eee 4 225 show spanning tree 6 6 ee cece 4 226 show spanning tree mst configuration oooooocccoomo 4 229 TABLE OF CONTENTS xviii VEAN Commands tilda eww es Ae A 4 229 Editing VLAN Groups 6 000s cece eee eee 4 230 vlan database ane ict de Sit ae gee ii 4 230 VAIL epee accent seein aioe Mea cat shea Rinna ct Li 4 231 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 0 4 232 interface Vani A dk Mage ten ek ent Ss eo AR So 4 232 switchport mode eee eee 4 233 switchport acceptable frame types o oooooommm 4 234 switchport ingress filtering oooooooooommmm o 4 235 switchport native vlan 2 1 eee 4 236 switchport allowed vlan 1 0 6 4 237 switchport forbidden vlan ooooooocoommmoo 4 238 Displaying VLAN Information 00 0 00008 4 239 show Watts sic A atk Ab OL 4 239 Configuring Private VLANs 00 cece eee ee eee 4 240 VIA Non A thas SRM a i iio 4 240 show pylan ati ees 3 4 241 Configuring Protocol based VLANS 00000008 4 242 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups 4 243 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces 4 244 show protocol vlan protocol group ooooomm 4 245 show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group 4 246 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
70. 4 293 ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name address address2 address8 name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters address Corresponding IP address address2 address8 Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Setting No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device 4 285 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias Console clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console config tclear host Console config 4 286 DNS CoMMANDS ip domain name This command defines the default domain nam
71. Action Soan IP anios Subnet TOS Prucedence DSCP Protocol pure Port Pemnalion pon Conal Code Remove Mask Bitmask Bitmask C40 Binmask Pert 10710 1255255 255 255 Any Any Any Any Any 6 Any Any Ary Any Any Any Remove Pent 132 168 1 01255 265 255 255 Any Any Any Any Any E any Any o esa lay lany amoa OSCP psa Bamask 065535 Control Code Btmask 0 63 as Figure 3 45 ACL Configuration Extended IP CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through ACCESS CONTROL LISTS 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 123 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config std acl Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny tules Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all
72. Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 274 4 273 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 274 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Command Usage e The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect e This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an init
73. Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 64 Dynamic Addresses CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 201 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console 3 155 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Status Enables disables the aging function Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 400 seconds Figure 3 65 Address Aging CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 202 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 156 The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automat
74. E SSH Sener Key Size 612896 512 Figure 3 36 SSH Server Settings USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 50 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 51 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 52 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 4 52 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 56 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh 4 56 Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state 0 admin 2 0 cipher 3des session started Console disconnect 0 4 25 Console Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or mote device MAC addresses that ate authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port
75. Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if 4 260 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping 1 e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 cos value Class
76. Extension Commands 4 247 Priority Commands 0 6 06 cece cee eee 4 252 Priority Commands Layer 2 00 eee eee 4 252 Default CoS Priority Levels oooooo ommoo o o 4 256 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 oo mo 4 259 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values 4 262 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values oooo o 4 263 Multicast Filtering Commands 00 4 267 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 000 o 4 268 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 0 4 272 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 276 Basic IP Configuration Commands 4 278 DNS Commands tun ias 4 284 show dns cache display description 4 293 Troubleshooting Chart 0 cece cece B 1 xxiii TABLES Xxiv FIGURES Figute 3 1 cHome Page cere bs 4 dt a S 3 3 Figure 3 2 Panel Display 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 3 5 Figure 3 3 System Information 0 0 0 0 000 c eee eee eee 3 15 Figure 3 4 Switch Information 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 3 17 Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration 3 19 Figure 3 6 IP Interface Configuration Manual 3 22 Figure 3 7 IP Interface Configuration DHCP 3 23 Figure 3 8 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames 3 25 Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware 0 cece 3 27 Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code snurrer 3 28 Figure 3 11 Deleting Files 0
77. Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled for disabled This setting is fixed at Disabled for all 10G ports Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member 7 There are interoperability problems between Flow Control and Head of Line HOL blocking for the switch ASIC Flow Control is therefore not supported for this switch 8 Port Information only 3 121 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e Creation Showsifa trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Speed Duplex Status 10G Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled 106 Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled 10G Enabled Down 10Gfull None Disabled 10G Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled 10G Enabled D 10Gfull None Disabled 10G Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled 110G Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled 10G Enabled 10Gfull None Disabled Admin Status Trunk Member Flow Control Status D o a Name Type Autonegotiation i OPN OD mS wjn Figure 3 51 Port Port Information Field Attributes CLI Basic information e Port type Indicates the port type 10G or 100 TX MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting
78. General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and 3 231 domain list and specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name 3 234 to address mapping Cache Displays cache entries discovered by 3 236 designated name servers 3 13 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Basic Configuration Displaying System Information 3 14 You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system e Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface e Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet server port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Authentication login Shows the user lo
79. ID on a remote 3 60 device Users Configures SNMP v3 users 3 61 Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users on a remote 3 63 device Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3 66 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3 72 Security 3 53 User Accounts Configures user names passwords and 3 75 access levels Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence 3 76 RADIUS and TACACS HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 81 SSH 3 84 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 89 3 7 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 8 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and 3 87 private Port Security Configures per port security including 3 91 status response for security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1X Port authentication 3 94 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 95 Configuration Configures global configuration parameters 3 96 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual 3 97 ports Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected 3 101 port ACL 3 105 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or 3 105 MAC addresses Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL tules are 3 113 checked Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 119 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed 3 103 management access Port 3
80. IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the router adds header information Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached The following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 4 283 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE DN 4 284 Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console
81. IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egtess Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL 3 119 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 120 When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes Port Port number Range 1 8 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port IN ACL for ingress packets OUT ACL for egress packets ACL Name Name of the ACL Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding Port IP MAC IN OUT I
82. If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration 3 186 VLAN CONFIGURATION Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join
83. Information CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 248 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 UpTime at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time 3 190 VLAN CONFIGURATION Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 y Up Time at Creation 040 hO min7 Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Unitl Porl a Unitl Port2 Unitl Por3 Unitl Pong Uniti Portb Unitl Pon Uni
84. LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol par tner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 3 139 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 140 Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Interface Port fe Trunk ID 1 Partner Admin System ID T 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority n 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key j 3 Admin State Expired O
85. Output rate rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 1 to 10000 Mbps Default Setting 10000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 8 Console config if rate limit input 6000 Console config 1f Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link 1 e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to four trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 10 Gbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 40 Gbps at full duplex 4 185 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 48 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface Configures a trunk and enters GC 4 170 port channel interface configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 187 Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp Configures LACP for the current IC Ethernet 4 188 interface lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system IC Ethernet 4 190 priority lacp admin key Confi
86. Priority IP Port Priority Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority IP Port Number TCP UDP e0 Class of Service Value 0 7 0 2 none IP Port Priority Table _ RemovelPPort IP Port Figure 3 92 IP Port Priority CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 1 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings Console config tmap ip port 4 259 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 260 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 4 264 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 1 80 0 Console 3 218 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping CoS Values to ACLs Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see page 3 208 Table 3 16 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Priority 0 1 2 3
87. Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 5 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password O password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the 8 10GE L2 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config tusername guest password 0 password Console config tusername admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address 2 6 You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subne
88. System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 50 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information 4 195 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 196 Table 4 50 show lacp internal display description Continued Field Description LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel Priority group Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Expired The actors receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming fram
89. TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Path Cost The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root which include this port Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 172 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on pa
90. Table 4 16 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started 4 56 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Table 4 16 show ssh display description Continued Field Description Username The user name of the client Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac shal aes192 cbc hmac shal aes256 cbc hmac shal 3des cbc hmac shal blowfish cbc hmac shal aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining shal Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 c
91. To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config ksnmp server community admin rw Console config ksnmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled BASIC CONFIGURATION Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP cli
92. Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 4 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk1 Uniti Portl Trunk1 Unitl Por lt Add Trunk 1 4 Remove Port 3 gt Figure 3 53 Static Trunk Configuration CLI This example creates trunk 1 with ports 1 and 2 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 1 4 170 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 177 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Console config if channel group 1 4 187 Port type 10G Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A2 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex 10G full Capabilities Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 10G full Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Console 3 129 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 130 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you enable LACP
93. VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 4 59 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private VLANS GC 4 240 show pvlan Displays the configured private VLANS PE 4 241 pvlan This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link nterface list down link nterface lisf no pvlan up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined Command Mode Global Configuration 4 240 VLAN COMMANDS Command Usage e A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch e Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN You must first enable Private VLANs with the pvlan command before configuring port members as shown in the following example Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 12 as the uplink and ports 5 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan
94. added to the VLAN tag e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list VLAN CONFIGURATION Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 Defeultvlan Enabled MaN iD 1 4094 2 lt lt Add MLAN Name R amp D Remove Status lv Enabled Figure 3 76 VLAN Static List Creating VLANs CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 230 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 231 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 239 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Console 3
95. agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 55 and Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users on page 3 63 The engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 60 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action SODOOO0OO3O004e26316c54321 h 92 168 1 19 Remove aua Figure 3 27 Setting an Engine ID SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL CLI This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id remote 192 168 1 19 12345abcdef 4 159 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 160 Local SNMP EngineID 12345abcdef000000000000000 Local SNMP EngineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 12345abcdef0 192168 1 01 9 Console Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPVv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write or notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 3
96. assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the preceding item Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the
97. be automatically generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 2 3 4 Enable the SNMP agent page 3 53 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 72 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 66 3 55 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 56 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps Sy GIN Gy Isr Enable the SNMP agent page 3 53 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 72 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 66 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 3 60 Then configure a remote user page 3 63 Command Attributes Trap Mana
98. column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users New Delete A sr Namel Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions F daw DefaultROGroup v1 noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group F chris sampr3users v3 authPriv MD5 DES56 Ic hange Group F steve snmpwusers va authNoPriv MD5 None Ic hange Group SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User p User Name G Group Name C snmpv3users Secuty Mode M g SNMPv3 Users Edit Security Level oAuthNoP User Authentication i Authentication Protocol MD5 User Name david a o Authentication Password Group Name Data Pri 19 DefauttROGroup ata Privacy J Privacy Protocol Back _ Change Privacy Password Back Add Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Users SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config Hsnmp server user chris r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 166 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 168 Engineld 12345abcdef000000000000000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user Console Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPVv3 user is defined by a unique name U
99. command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 4 37 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 29 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 98 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 99 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 99 radius server Sets the number of retries GC 4 100 retransmit radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending GC 4 100 authentication requests show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 101 4 97 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
100. configures Ethernet port 9 capabilities to 100half and 100full Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 9 config if capabilities 100half config if capabilities 100full config if Related Commands negotiation 4 172 speed duplex 4 171 shutdown 4 174 This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons INTEREACE COMMANDS Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 1042 262143 Default Setting Enabled e Packet rate limit 1042 pps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that t
101. decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 6 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 83 Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status M Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 431 Figure 3 34 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 43 Console config ip http secure port 441 4 44 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certifica
102. default Console config dotlx max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotlx max req count no dotlx max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 4 108 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x max req 2 Console config if dot1x port control This command sets the dotlx mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dotlx port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access e force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x port control auto Console config 1f 4 109 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx o
103. default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server 3 77 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 78 You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the i
104. eee eee 4 SHP SEVE VIEW io nits se I eae ha la 4 show smtp VIEW a i 4k pad apy dete Deena Des 4 SMMP SEfVeL PTOUP orea eee ee cee cence eee 4 show snmp PLOUP ia oF doses gig ed ered a tds 4 SHINP SErVer USEF r ir Vs a a lie aeara Wade Glas a 4 show snmp User 23 53 Laan het ia eas 4 Interface Commands meande nya aane cece eens 4 terface 2 n ay hated op ot a te Me aaah dha ace 4 ESCAPA Biota ties Whee Sige Wea eh Bie 4 speed duplex ica aa da da 4 ESO HA OD 26 e O dt 4 Capabilities ostia E Sta iia Aa 4 shutdow tit rises ANA dato eto tad che o los Sada IES 4 switchport broadcast packet rate ooooooooocccmmomo 4 eleaf COUDICES we sh lel de eS tak ses adi ds 4 show interfaces status 6 0 me i eee 4 show interfaces countetS 6 6c eee cece eee 4 show interfaces switchport 0 6 0 0 cee eee cece ee 4 Mirror Port Commands 6 000s 4 POLO ss csch esd sg Alea seca he on aa ee 4 show POLtMONMMOL limita doit Gadde aa ANG oe Ben aed 4 Rate Limit Commands ssis ern eea a EE A EE AEE EAA 4 rate a adn A A A 4 Link Aggregation Commands 0 00 4 channel group it avai tia igh a Bes 4 A E aa aaah ann es eg 4 151 152 153 153 154 155 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 166 168 169 170 170 171 172 TABLE OF CONTENTS lacp system priority nsona aara cece eee 4 190 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface oooommmm cm o 4 191 lacp admin key Port Channe
105. eee eee 4 268 ip igmp snooping vlan static 6 eee ee eee eee 4 269 ip igmp snooping version 6 6 eee eee eee 4 269 show ip igmp snooping seess sses eee eee 4 270 show mac address table multicast oo oooooo o 4 271 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 1 0 0c eee ee eee 4 272 ip igmp snooping quetier 6 eee eee eee 4 272 ip igmp snooping query count 0 0 00 cee 4 273 ip igmp snooping query interval oooooo oooooo 4 274 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 274 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 275 Static Multicast Routing Commands 0005 4 276 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 00 0000 08 4 276 show ip igmp snooping mrouter o o ooooomomooo o oo 4 277 IP Interface Commands irase dra reta a a Mien a a a 4 278 Basic IP Configuration 0 6 0 6 ccc eee eee 4 278 ipaddress rr Racket ed eh gah hs eed Bg oe 4 279 ip default gateway 0 eee eee 4 280 tp dhcp restart erimmi a ie eek ad NG A ae Re a 4 281 show ip intertace lt cita etl a een ee 4 282 show ip tedirects tdt bid Aided ls Sl dake bd 4 282 PI a bil A da 4 283 xix TABLE OF CONTENTS XX DNS Commands mii a 4 284 Posta a EEE old acest Aa 4 285 Cl athOst a A E A A ce 4 286 ip domain Dame 1 A 4 287 ip domain list ened anan sagas 5a 4 288 ip AE VEL zoran h A A AER SSS 4 289 ip domain lookup 00 eee 4 290 SHOW HOSES td Aid ue Ds dt Bie don Any dea SSP ek
106. enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Default Setting e Status Disabled e Action None e Maximum Addresses O Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 4 105 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 106 Command Usage If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number
107. errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors 3 147 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 148 Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which tra
108. exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be ona shared link RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst ustance_id cost e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode Ether
109. ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax show access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs 4 131 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 128 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group acl_nam
110. fo Auto Z F Enabled F Enabled 2 F Enabled Discarding 128 fo Auto gt F Enabled F Enabled 3 F Enabled Discarding he booo Auto F Enabled I Enabled Pa F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto Z F Enabled F Enabled 5 F Enabled Discarding 128 b iw F Enabled Enabled 6 Enabled Discarding 128 o F Auto aj Cc Enabled Tr Enabled 7 Tenas piscas fO fo gt fo Penes Fenai yy Figure 3 69 STA Port Configuration CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 170 Console config if no spanning tree spanning disabled 4 217 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 219 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 218 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 222 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 220 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 4 225 3 175 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 176 MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You sho
111. for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 75 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 3 85 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 86 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317 81366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938006090253948 40848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150 45306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s p
112. globally for the switch e Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information 802 1X System Authentication Control Enabled Figure 3 38 802 1X Global Information 3 95 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 96 CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1x 4 113 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 8 Console Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protoco
113. hosts Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 50 for further information about these authentication and encryption options port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 4 155 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting e Host Address None Notification Type Traps e SNMP Version 1 UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you m
114. if exit Console config Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctr K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Cttl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctr1 U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cutsor back one word 4 11 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Continued Keystroke Function Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word
115. information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services DiffServ DiffServ provides quality of service on large networks by employing a well defined set of building blocks from which a variety of aggregate forwarding behaviors may be built Each packet carries information DS byte used by each hop to give it a particular forwarding treatment or per hop behavior at each network node DiffServ allocates different levels of service to users on the network with mechanisms such as traffic meters shapers droppers packet markers at the boundaries of the network Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forward
116. ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart client command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway 2 7 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 8 If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP addtess allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt e To obtain IP settings via BOOTP
117. key size Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compartes the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch 4 49 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh ser
118. locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then uses the EAP between the switch and the authentication server to verify the client s right to access the network via an authentication server 1 e RADIUS server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection SNMP Version 3 IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount
119. mac access group 4 145 access list mac mask precedence This command changes to MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule 4 141 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 142 mac access group 4 145 mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host sowrce bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vid bitmask ethertype ethertype bitmask pktformat Check the packet format fi
120. management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup to TFTP server Backup and Restore Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web SSL HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1 2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs DHCP Client Supported DNS Client and proxy service Port Configuration Speed and duplex mode 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Table 1 1 Key Features Continued Feature Description Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 4 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Address Table Up to 16K MAC addresses in forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Bridge Store and Forwa rd Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eli
121. mark red remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config 4 167 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show snmp user 4 168 This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 43 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Authentication The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Protocol Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device INTEREACE COMMANDS Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 44 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters GC 4 170 interf
122. max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 4 216 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if
123. nobticabon Error Message Level 5 Module 6 functons 1 error number1 Intormaton System coldStert notification Figure 3 18 Displaying Logs 3 43 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 4 66 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see table on page 3 39 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Le
124. of Service value Range 0 7 4 261 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping Table 4 66 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues e This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 262 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one
125. of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3 2002 formerly IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 4 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES IEEE 802 1D Bridge Th
126. operational state for local side neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side e sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lacp 1 counters Port channel 1 LACPDUs Sent 1 LACPDUs Receive 5 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 4 194 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Table 4 49 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Received Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Unknown Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Pkts Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp 1 internal Port channel 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP
127. or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port VLAN CONFIGURATION Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 187 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 gt Name R amp D Status Y Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 a O c 2 a O O 3 C c cC G 4 O c G 5 c C c a s Figure 3 77 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 237 Console config if exit Con
128. or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any adjacent multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Based on the group membership information learned from IGMP a router switch can determine which if any multicast traffic needs to be forwarded to each of its ports At Layer 3 multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note that IGMP neither alters nor routes IP multicast packets A multicast routing protocol must be used to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks Therefore when DVMRP or PIM routing is enabled for a subnet on this switch you also need to enable IGMP Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 3 222 IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query page 3 223 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot lo
129. packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dotlx mode for a port interface IC 4 109 dotix Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x IC 4 110 operation mode port dotix Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4111 re authenticate dotix Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4111 re authentication dot1x timeout Sets the time that a switch port waits after IC 4 112 quiet period the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout Sets the time period after which a IC 4 112 re authperiod connected client must be te authenticated dot1x timeout Sets the time period during an IC 4 113 tx period authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 113 4 107 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx system auth control This command enables IEEE 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dotlx system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1ix system auth control Console config dotlx default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotix
130. page 46 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 ce DI ce 9 e aE 4 87 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 88 e Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory e You can use Factory_Default_Config cfe as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help e For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 83 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 4 43 Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file o
131. port field destination port Check the protocol destination port field port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags e flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode IP Mask ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Ifyou enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in whi
132. release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host ost_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server 4 61 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses e The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility 4 62 This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility Ape type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of me
133. rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list ip ac _name set priority priority set tos fos_value set dscp dscp_value no match access list ip ac _name e acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority tos_value IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e dsep_valne Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag To specify this priority use the set priority keywords 4 135 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service To specify the IP precedence priority use the set tos keywords To specify the DSCP priority use the set dscp keywords Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this swit
134. settings These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface 3 33 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 34 Command Attributes Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 0 seconds Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some
135. show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 29 reload Restarts the system PE 4 30 4 26 GENERAL COMMANDS Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 31 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or any 4 31 exits the CLI quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 32 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion any NA context sensitive enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Syntax enable level level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec 4 27 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 37 The ff character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 28 enab
136. switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 77 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes e SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds 3 47 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server 10 10 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36
137. the LAG system ID Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 53 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac address table Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 199 static clear Removes any learned entries from the PE 4 200 mac address table forwarding database dynamic show Displays entries in the bridge forwarding PE 4 201 mac address table database mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 202 aging time show Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 203 mac address table aging time 4 198 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan v an id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mod
138. the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 3 153 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses 3 91 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 92 already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access If a port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 125 Command Attributes Port Port number Range 1 8 Name Descriptive text page 4 170 Action Indicates the actio
139. threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh hresho d no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line 4 20 LINE COMMANDS Related Commands silent time 4 21 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time t
140. to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tftp to file TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 119 File Type opcode Source File Name M3002 bix v3001 y Destination File Name o fv3002 Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware If you download to a new destination file go to the File Management Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu 3 27 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 28 Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes C Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 455 startup1 cfg Config_File Y 979 c v3001 Operation_Code N 3152916 v3002 Operation_Code Y 3152916 Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code To delete a file select System File Management Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Delete Name Type Startup Size bytes TT Factory_Default_Config cfy Config File N 455 m startup1 cfg Config_File Y 979 m v3001 Operation_Code N 315
141. topology changes to about 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices 1 5 INTRODUCTION 1 6 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network Simplify network management for node changes moves by re
142. under Displaying Global Settings page 3 158 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 168 3 177 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID fi Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Bridge ID 32768 1 0030F1D473AD Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d0 hO min 1 s Priority 0 61440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance VLAN 1 Remove MST ID 0 4094 VLAN 10 Add Figure 3 70 MSTP VLAN Configuration SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 1 Spanning tree information MSTP enabled 1 1 32768 2 20 15 2 20 15 20 20 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enabled disabled Instance VLANs configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Roo
143. will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 15 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 3 215 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Table 3 15 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Attributes e DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP Priority Table Restore Default DSCP 1 CoS 0 DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP 5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 y Class of Semice Value 0 7 1 Figure 3 90 IP DSCP Priority 3 216 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priori
144. with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that 4 213 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst nstance_id priority priority no mst nstance_ d priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 priority Priority of the spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTT alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 4 214 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Example Console config mstp Hmst 1 priority 4096 Console config mst
145. 0 Web Server Commands 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 4 41 ipshttpPOLe ccd tides Stl nto deat Se Ac 4 42 Ipphttp Server iia acs Aah hens Ga ts Bes Sheds ARs 4 42 ip http secure server escac reisan eee 4 43 ip http secure port 1 ryeal saa eee eee 4 44 Telnet Server Commands 000s 4 45 ipstelmet server prrs Sk Ase es ak he ae Se 4 46 TABLE OF CONTENTS Secute Shell Commands ooooocooooorormcrcnccorono oo 4 46 Ip Ssh SELVEL A delle ade da DA ii 4 50 ip SSH MCOOL ii A o 4 51 ip ssh authentication retties oooooooococoommoo 4 52 ip ssh server key size ooooooocooomommmmmm 9mmmomooo 4 52 delete publicas oii wigs Bis A A a 4 53 ip ssh crypto host key generate 1 6 0 0 00 cece eee 4 53 Ip SshsCrypto Zeroize ii A kee ee sk 4 54 ip ssh save host key 6 ccc eee ees 4 55 SHOW 1p SS hiv sites plas dial boa ahead hs E 4 56 AEO NEL as A E cea Oi 4 56 show public key oa anibal e 4 57 Event Logging Commands o ococcoocccccconocccccc oo 4 59 LON ARA EER 4 59 logging history iia od ddan id ah ee 4 60 loget hostia Pca EAs Sahel Oe canta Reins ae 4 61 logoe facility 30s a ens 4 62 LOA trap cs E age ode at oaths LA ad es Dell 4 63 Clear log sic Sete arate aoe a ad 4 64 show logge A Bh eee a eR ae AA Dee bse 4 64 SHOW OG Ge chee nt ete bts nian See tee ee 4 66 SMTP Alert Commands 0 6 00 0 0 4 67 logging sendmail host 0 6 06 eee 4 68 logging sendmail level 1 0 0 0 eee eee 4 69 logging sendmail
146. 0 000 e ee 4 126 mask PACE Saas fe ee Mees deans bafta os eases Lae 4 128 show access list ip mask precedence ooommm 4 131 Ip ACCESS BIQUP dit lo Ahk Sage add cece ida 4 132 show ip ACCESS QLOUP 6 eee eee 4 133 map access list Ip eee ee eee 4 133 show map access list ip 6 6 eee eee 4 134 match access list ipo eee eee 4 135 show Marking ud al hte 4 136 MAC ACTS Sess AA Se ARES Goa Bins ace ORA 4 137 ACCESSTTSEMAC ei Sept dows Sete cd Ant ee Sa Ae 4 138 permit deny MAC ACL 0 0 6 4 139 show mac access list 2 0 eee eee 4 141 access list mac mask precedence 000505 4 141 mask MAC ACD cunas ici 4 142 show access list mac mask precedence 4 144 MAC ACCESS OTOUP dir ita Not toe Nees 4 145 show mac ACCESS QFOUP 6 ee tee ee 4 145 map access list MAC eee eee 4 146 show map access list mac 6 eee eee 4 147 match access list Mac n ee eee eee 4 148 ACTO TAO e da 4 149 show access list eee eee eee eee eee 4 149 XV TABLE OF CONTENTS xvi show ACCESS ZFOUP oo eee eee eee 4 SNMP Commands ti dd Sg a dei 4 SAMP a ii 4 SHOW SD ea AS A 4 snmp server COMMUNILY 66 ee eee 4 SMMp Server COMPAC aa u EEA aa ee Ea ee 4 snmp setver location 1 0 6 eee ee ee 4 snimp server host lt y6 c hs nt Mad ha Ben Mg Bike i Rs 4 snmp server enable traps 0 cece eee eee 4 smmp server engine id 2 6 eee eee eee 4 show snmp engine id 6
147. 00 20 15 2001 Name Dhaka Hours 0 13 6 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction C Before UTC After UTC Figure 3 22 Clock Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 4 76 Console config 3 49 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Simple Network Management Protocol 3 50 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects ate defined in a Management Information Base MIB that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware as well as the traffic passing through i
148. 1 eee 3 28 Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up 3 32 Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 3 33 Figure 3 14 Configuring the Console Port ooommm oo o 3 35 Figure 3 15 Configuring the Telnet Interface ooooom 3 37 Figure 3 16 System Logs 0 cece eee eee 3 40 Figure 3 17 Remote Logs jc vcd ena fad a 3 42 Figure 3 18 Displaying Logs 0 0 6 0 cece eee 3 43 Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 45 Figure 3 20 Resetting the System 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 3 46 Figure 3 21 SNTP Configuration 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 48 Figure 3 22 Clock Time Zone 1 1 0 6 cece eee 3 49 Figure 3 23 Enabling the SNMP Agent 0 0004 3 53 Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings 3 54 Figure 3 25 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers 3 58 Figure 3 26 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID oooooo o oo o 3 59 Figure 3 27 Setting an Engine ID 0 eee 3 60 Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 0 000000008 3 62 Figure 3 29 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3 65 Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups o oooooooccccco coo 3 71 Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 0 000000 0 0s 3 73 Figure 3 32 User Accounts ores enia a E ee 3 76 Figure 3 33 Authentication Server Settings oooommm 3 80 Figure 3 34 HTTPS Settings 0 eee eee 3 83 Fi
149. 1 38 01 58 Fax 39 02 739 14 17 Fax 31 33 455 73 30 Fax 49 0 89 92861 230 Fax 46 0 887 62 62 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 216 71751415 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 7 095 789 35 73 Fax 86 10 6235 4962 Fax 886 2 8797 6288 Fax 65 6 238 6466 Fax 82 2 553 7202 Fax 81 45 224 2331 Fax 61 2 8875 7777 Fax 91 22 8204443 If you are looking for further contact information please visit www smc com www smec europe com or WWW smc asia com SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Model Number SMC8708L2 F 3 0 0 4 Pub Number 149100024300A E052005 RO1
150. 121 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 121 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 121 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 125 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 125 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 128 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page LACP 3 127 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 130 Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation 3 132 group members Port Counters Displays statistics for LACP protocol 3 135 Information messages Port Internal Displays settings and operational state for 3 136 Information the local side Port Neighbors Displays settings and operational state for 3 139 Information the remote side Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 141 port Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each 3 141 trunk Mirror Port Sets the source and target ports for 3 143 Configuration mirroring Rate Limit 3 145 Input Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 145 Port Configuration Input Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 145 Trunk Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 145 Port Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 145 Trunk Configuration Port Statistics Lists
151. 191 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link 1 e the ports on this switch Port Port number Range 1 8 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link ageregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 PORT CONFIGURATION e PortPriority Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You c
152. 192 2 192 168 1 25 192 Console ient P address Web Server Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser GC 4 42 interface ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4 42 configured from a browser ip http Enables HTTPS HTTP SSL for encrypted GC 4 43 secure server communications 1p http Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 44 secure port 4 41 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 42 ip http server 4 42 This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config Htip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 42 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTT
153. 2 Figure 3 21 SNTP Configuration CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp client 4 72 Console config tsntp poll 16 4 74 Console config Hsntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 73 Console config exit Console show sntp 4 75 Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console 3 48 BASIC CONFIGURATION Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes e Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters Hours 0 13 The number of hours before after UTC Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Note The maximum value is 13 00 Current Time Jan 1
154. 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 5 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Current root port Current root cost 0000 Number of topology changes 2 Last topology changes time sec 303 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method ong Admin status enabled Role root State forwarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin path cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 4 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 2 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled 3 181 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e Port Port identifier Range 1 8 STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 168 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an in
155. 2 1X is enabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 8 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Multi Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console 4 116 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a lis
156. 2 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name bob AT A A Ea ee Permit Any Any 00 e0 29 94 34 de EAE Any Any 2048 65535 Any Remove Action Permit Source Address Type Any Source MAC Address fioa000000000 Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any Destination MAC Address 0000 0000 0000 Destination Birnask VID VID Bitmask Ethemet Type Ethemet Type Bitmask Packet Format Any y Aas Figure 3 46 ACL Configuration MAC ACCESS CONTROL LISTS CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 4 123 Console config mac acl Configuring ACL Masks You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage Up to seven
157. 2 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available 3 61 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 62 e Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required e Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change Group in the Actions
158. 2916 ff v3002 Operation_Code Y 3152916 Figure 3 11 Deleting Files BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console copy tftp file 4 87 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name V3002 bix Destination file name V3002 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V3002 4 93 Console config exit Console reload 4 30 3 29 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 30 You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file
159. 3 dynamic addresses displaying 3 154 4 201 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 3 171 3 174 4 220 event logging 4 59 Index 1 INDEX F firmware displaying version 3 16 4 84 upgrading 3 27 4 87 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 21 4 280 GVRP global setting 3 189 4 247 interface configuration 3 198 4 249 H hardware version displaying 3 16 4 84 HTTPS 3 81 4 43 HTTPS secure server 3 81 4 43 I IEEE 802 1D 3 157 4 206 IEEE 802 1s 4 206 IEEE 802 1w 3 157 4 206 IEEE 802 1X 3 94 4 107 IGMP description of protocol 3 222 groups displaying 3 228 4 271 Layer 2 3 222 4 268 query 3 222 4 272 query Layer 2 3 223 4 272 snooping 3 222 4 268 snooping configuring 3 223 4 268 ingress filtering 3 197 4 235 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 22 4 279 setting 2 6 3 20 4 279 IP port priority Index 2 enabling 3 217 4 259 mapping priorities 3 217 4 260 IP precedence enabling 3 213 4 261 mapping priorities 3 213 4 261 J jumbo frame 4 85 L LACP configuration 4 185 local parameters 3 136 4 194 partner parameters 3 139 4 194 protocol message statistics 4 194 protocol parameters 3 132 4 185 Link Aggregation Control Protocol See LACP link type STA 3 171 3 174 4 222 logging syslog traps 4 63 to syslog servers 4 61 log in Web interface 3 3 logon authentication 3 74 4 94 RADIUS client 3 76 4 97 RADIUS server 3 76 4 97 TACAC
160. 3 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration CLI The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 3 4 243 Console config if 3 205 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply
161. 4 100 tadius server timeout 0 eee eee eee eee 4 100 show tadius server ced 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 101 TACACSA Clients ices toda UI rabo N One SS 4 102 tacacs setvet NOSE cat didas sedan ind a 4 102 tacacs Server Port hcg Me has be Lee AS 4 103 tacacs servet key 0 cece ec eee cee ee roo 4 103 Show taCdacs Server Ahi gaiti Ata ied A i 4 104 Port Security Commands 0 0 c cee eee eee ee 4 104 POLE SECUTILY 2 Massie Sie As Hen Wee Be Go A Bi Sea eee 4 105 802 1X Port Authentication serisi mimiss i eee 4 107 dotlx system auth control 1 0 0 0 0 4 108 dotlx default nisi dt it ait artis ae 4 108 dotlx maten a Be 4 108 dotlx port control 2 0 eee 4 109 TABLE OF CONTENTS dotlx operation mode 0 6 cece eee eee 4 110 dotlx re authenticate 2 6 eee eee 4 111 dotlx re authentication 6 0 eee eee 4 111 dotlx timeout quiet period 00 0 e ce eee 4 112 dot1x timeout re authperiod 0 00 0 e ee 4 112 dot1x timeout tx petiod 6 6 6 eee eee 4 113 show dotia A idk ia 4 113 Access Control List Commands 00 00 eee eee ee 4 117 EPPA CUS pooch in A AA ba 4 119 access lis Lido ende add Ute ad 4 120 access list ip extended fragment auto mask 4 121 permit deny Standard ACL 0 eee eee eee 4 122 permit deny Extended ACL 0 0000 4 123 show ip access list 6 6 6 cece eee eee 4 126 access list ip mask precedence
162. 4 160 engine id snmp server view Adds an SNMP view GC 4 161 show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 4 162 snmp server group Adds an SNMP group mapping users to GC 4 163 views show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 4 164 snmp server user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC 4 166 show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 4 168 snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config 4 151 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show snmp 4 152 This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name s
163. 4 21 e 4 22 e 4 23 e 4 24 e 4 25 e 4 26 e 4 27 e 4 28 e 4 29 e 4 30 e 4 31 e 4 32 e 4 33 e 4 34 e 4 35 e 4 36 e 4 37 e 4 38 e 4 39 e 4 40 e 4 41 e 4 42 e 4 43 e 4 44 e 4 45 e 4 46 e 4 47 e 4 48 e 4 49 e 4 50 e 4 51 e 4 52 e 4 53 Event Logging Commands o o o cocooooocccccccoco o 4 59 Lopoing Levels Li aah ga E S E T Sats 4 60 show logging flash ram display description 4 65 show logging trap display descripti0N 4 66 SMTP Alert Commands 0 00000008 4 67 Time Commands ts pats ie 4 72 System Status Commands 000 00002 4 78 Frame Size Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 85 Flash File Commands 0 00000 cece cece eens 4 86 File Directory Information 000 000005 4 91 Authentication Commands 0 000000 4 94 Authentication Sequence Commands 4 94 RADIUS Client Commands 000 4 97 TACACS Client Commands 004 4 102 Port Security Commands 0 0 00 0 0c eee eee 4 105 802 1X Port Authentication Commands 4 107 Access Control List Commands 4 119 TP ACE Comitiands s 51 4 chaired wetted BON wie Oto 4 119 Egress Queue Priority Mapping ooooooo o 4 134 MAC ACL Commands 0 00 e eee eee 4 137 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACLs 4 146 ACL Information Commands 04 4 149 SNMP Commands 0 cece eee
164. 4 291 SLOW GIS eps Weng habe ds Secs 4 292 show dis cache tii ade a 4 4 292 clear dns Cache vivir ida 4 293 Software Specifications ooooooomooo o o A 1 Software Peatutes oc es ecae ia A 1 Management Features tiara Lee kee A 2 Standards heb o E oa EE Al hed ie Molde alt A 2 Management Information Bases 0 6 0 0 cece cece ee eee A 3 Troubles hood OR AOS aH As B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface o oooommmm B 1 Using System Loos iii ll o ate She Ae a a B 3 Glossary Index Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 1 1 e 1 2 e 3 1 e 3 2 e 3 3 e 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 4 e 4 5 e 4 6 e 4 7 e 4 8 e 4 9 e 4 10 e 4 11 e 4 12 e 4 13 e 4 14 e 4 15 e 4 16 Key Peatures y3 oct66 Gert e te ert es de hee Pek es 1 1 System Defaults sire divin goss li Moet area vent 1 7 Web Page Configuration Buttons o ooooooomo 3 4 Main Menos a A beh 3 6 Logging Levels asr csrressso ary rorta co 3 39 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels 3 51 Supported Notification Messages ooooommmo 3 67 HTTPS System Support 0 00 ee eee eee 3 82 802 IX Statistics os eevee ed re aed Y 3 101 LAGP Port Counters menisco star aterra ibas 3 135 LACP Int
165. 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule Command Attributes Port Port identifier Range 1 8 Name Name of ACL e Type Type of ACL IP or MAC e CoS Priority CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule Range 0 7 23 For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 105 3 219 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority ACL CoS Priority Select a port select an ACL rule specify a CoS priority then click Add ACL CoS Priority ACL CoS Priority Configure CoS Pray 7 ara a Port Name Type ACL CoS Priority Mapping Port Name Type CoS Priority 1 ei P o Remove Figure 3 93 ACL CoS Priority CLI This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 4 133 Console config if 3 220 MULTICAST FILTERING Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing pe FOW or streaming audio A multicast server 4 does not have to establish a separate C O connection with each client It merely JA l broadcasts its service to the network and gt C N CN any hosts that want to receive the ER oY w Y multic
166. 58 255 255 255 0 IP address DHCP no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP line console line VTY end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 78 4 82 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 14 e The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System description 8 10GE L2 Switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 47 System information System Up time 0 days 1 hours 23 minutes and 44 61 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC Address Unit1 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 Web Server enable Web Server port 80 Web Secure server enable Web Secure Server Sort 443 Telnet Server enable Telnet Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST result DUMMY Test T oir ip Sisco PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TEET ie save aed dies Sones PASS TiMET TESTS action Grind ep ease leds PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Console 4 83 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show users Shows all active
167. AN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 281 ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax no ip default gateway gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment 4 280 IP INTERFACE COMMANDS Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 282 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DCHP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode v
168. ANDS 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 161 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 163 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 151 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 158 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 161 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 163 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 4 159 NS AS Then configure a remote user page 4 166 The switch can send SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host Howev
169. Attributes Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions e Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 8 e Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Default Rx e Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic from the source port Range 1 8 3 143 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Mirror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 8 Both Destination 1 7 Add Source Port fi Remove e E Target Port fs Figure 3 60 Mirror Port Configuration CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 170 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 8 4 182 Console config if 3 144 PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exce
170. Bytes Frames 0 Fragments ol Refresh E Figure 3 62 Port Statistics 3 151 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows statistics for port 12 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 12 4 178 Ethernet 1 12 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound an
171. CP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Destination Source Destination Control Saaie Suhit Subnet oy Lies i ew rad Port Port Code Remove Mask i Bitmask Bitmask Bitmask 255 255 255 255 192 168 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled lany 0 Any Remove Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any Source Subnet Mask pooo Destination Address Type Any gt Destination Subnet Mask fono Protocol Mask Ir Enabled Service Type Mask TOS Enabled l Precedence Enabled MF DSCP Enabled Source Port Bitmask 0 65535 Destination Port Bitmask 0 6553 Control Code Bitmask 0 63 i Ada Figure 3 48 ACL Mask Configuration IP 3 116 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 4 120 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 4 122 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 126 Console config ip mask a
172. Conso Conso ed el el ex el el e config el el ex el el et config config config config config config spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree config spanning tree config spanning tree config mstp revision config mstp name R amp D config mstp max hops config mstp mode mstp priority 4096 hello time 5 max age 38 forward time 20 pathcost method long transmission limit 4 mst configuration ae 30 HS HS ds ds ds ds ds ed NUNNNF WWW Displaying Interface Settings 3 168 The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Port Ports 1 8 Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding SPANNING
173. Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters 4 34 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking v a the console or a Telnet connection page 4 14 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 94 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 107 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication GC 4 36 system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the GC 4 37 Privileged Exec level 4 35 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE username 4 36 This command adds named usets requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username same access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username
174. Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console 4 160 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 40 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP String identifying the engine ID enginelD Local SNMP The number of times that the engine has re initialized since engineBoots the snmp EngineID was last configured Remote SNMP String identifying an engine ID on a remote device engineID IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine snmp setver view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples e included Defines an included view e excluded Defines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree e The predefined view de
175. Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index Ethernet ports aggregated links and VLANs Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port 4 14 and Telnet including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode 4 26 restarting the system or quitting the CLI System Controls system logs system passwords user name 4 33 Management browser management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 86 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote 4 94 authentication also configures port security and IEEE 802 1X port access control Access Control Provides filtering for IP frames based on address 4 117 List protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures 4 150 community access strings and trap managers Interface Configures the connection parameters for all 4 169 4 12 COMMAND GROUPS Table 4 4 Command Group Index Continued Command Group Description Page Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data
176. ERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC price list Under the limited lifetime warranty internal and external power supplies fans and cables are covered by a standard one year warranty from date of purchase SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 TABLE OF CONTENTS TEO UCHOR e eee ERR re RA Se REE 8 ER OERS 1 1 SECAS A Std Manta Matty its stars 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 0 0 0 cece cee eee 1 3 System Default a da 1 7 Initial Configuration oooooooooomm om o o 2 1 Connecting to the Switch cooomccorrocooricrns nnu asii eunusi 2 1 Configuration OPUS cuan citi da 2 1 Required Connections 004 ci eee edie eee ike ean 2 2 Remote Connections cor tds 2 4 Basic Configuration esris p sacar vd wae ee ed teed vad aes 2 5 Console Connect On muni as thes et eek a his ae ete kes Se hs es 2 5 Setting Passwords Ji i cdi di cee bs ee 2 5 Setting an IP A
177. Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 146 Address Table 3 152 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or 3 153 VLAN Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the 3 154 Address Table 3 9 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 10 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 156 Spanning Tree 3 156 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 158 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STP 3 163 RSTP and MSTP Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 168 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 168 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 172 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for 3 172 STA MSTP VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a 3 176 spanning tree instance Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST 3 180 instance Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST 3 180 instance Port Configuration Configures port settings fora specified MST 3 182 instance Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified 3 182 MST instance VLAN 3 184 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3 189 Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type 3 189 supported by this
178. Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer 1 show exit end Console Console show history Execution command history 2 config history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 2 interface vlan 1 1 The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer w hen you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats t he second command in the Execution history buffer config Console Console Console 12 config config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default None Comma Setting nd Mode Privileged Exec 4 30 end exit GENERAL COMMANDS Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Mult
179. ID Description linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated RMON Events 1 2 risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entty crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps 3 68 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description fallingAlarm
180. INTERFACE COMMANDS ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address 7p address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address p address IP address netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the 4 279 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VL
181. IP ACL for ingress ports Or oN Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 3 106 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type 1P Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standard y Add Figure 3 43 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 4 120 Console config std acl
182. MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console show access list mac mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 142 4 144 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group acl_name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access li
183. N OUT 1 Enable david D Enable david z M Enable jery y T Enable jerry 2 M Enable david y I Enable I Enable fiery 2 I Enable fieny Z 3 I Enable david x T Enable david F Enable jerry I Enable jerry zj 4 T Enable da vid z I Enable davic I Enable jery T Enable jery z 5 I Enable da jid zj I Enable davic I Enable jery zj I Enable jerry z 6 I Enable david 2 F Enable david F Enable jery 2 I Enable jeny xl Figure 3 50 ACL Port Binding PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if ip access group david in 4 132 Console config if mac access group jerry in 4 145 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if exit Console config if Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Port Port number Name Interface label e Type Indicates the port type 10G Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down e Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode 10Gfull
184. N capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address 3 20 An IP address may be used for management access to the switch over your network By default the switch uses DHCP to assign IP settings to VLAN 1 on the switch If you wish to manually configure IP settings you need to set an IP address and subnet mask that is compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4093 This is the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 so a management station can be connected to any port on the switch However if other VLANs are configured and you change the Management VLAN you may lose management access to the switch In this case you should reconnect the management station to a port that is a member of the Management VLAN BASIC CONFIGURATION IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configu
185. NG THE SWITCH 3 70 Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description sw ThermalFalling 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when the Notification 76 2 1 0 59 temperature falls below the switchThermalActionFallingThresh old swModulelInsertion 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when a module is Notificaiton 76 2 1 0 60 inserted swModuleRemoval 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 This trap is sent when a module is Notificaiton 76 2 1 0 61 removed These are legacy notifications and therefore must be ena bled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu page 3 58 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read write and notify views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups Group Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View F public vi noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none F public noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none F private hNoPriv defaultview defaultview none F private V2 Group Properties F secure users V3 o Security Model Security Level
186. PS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access 1 e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number e When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data 4 43 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later versions The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Wi
187. Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence y Figure 3 88 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 4 259 Console config Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth 3 213 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 14 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Traffic Type Priority Traffic Type Level Level 7 Network Control 3 Flash 6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0 Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a va
188. Priority for untagged traffic 4 170 4 254 4 180 Enabled Disabled Disable Disable Hybrid Disabled All frames 1 0 Disabled 1 u 500 packets second 1000M bits per second 1000M bits per second 3 207 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 12 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table Howevet you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 13 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spate 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 wher
189. Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan v an id user igmp snooping vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console 4 271 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Table 4 70 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 router port expire time Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Allows this device to act as the querier GC 4 272 querier for IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 273 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 274 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 274 query max response ti me ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 275 ip igmp snoopi
190. RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC DRAFT 3414 2570 2273 3411 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB A 3 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation NMP v2 IP MIB RFC 2011 MP Framework MIB RFC 3411 MP MPD MIB RFC 3412 MP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 MP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 MP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 MP Community MIB RFC 2576 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 000 N N N N N N A 4 APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING Problems Accessing the Management Interface Symptom Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser ot SNMP softwate Be sure the switch is powered up Check network cabling between the management station and the switch Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has no
191. S client 3 77 4 102 TACACS server 3 77 4 102 logon authentication sequence 3 78 4 95 4 96 M main menu 3 6 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 mirror port configuring 3 143 4 182 MSTP 4 206 global settings 3 176 4 204 interface settings 3 172 4 205 multicast filtering 3 221 4 267 multicast groups 3 228 4 271 displaying 4 271 static 3 228 4 269 4 271 multicast services configuring 3 229 4 269 displaying 3 228 4 271 multicast static router port 3 227 4 276 P password line 4 17 passwords 2 5 administrator setting 3 75 4 36 path cost 3 159 3 170 method 3 165 4 211 STA 3 159 3 170 4 211 port authentication 3 94 4 107 port priority configuring 3 206 4 252 default ingress 3 206 4 254 STA 3 170 4 219 port security configuring 3 91 4 104 port statistics 3 146 4 178 ports autonegotiation 3 125 4 172 broadcast storm threshold 3 141 4 175 capabilities 3 125 4 173 duplex mode 3 125 4 171 speed 3 125 4 171 ports configuring 3 121 4 169 ports mirroring 3 143 4 182 priority default port ingress 3 206 4 254 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 3 175 4 225 INDEX Q queue weights 3 210 4 255 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 76 4 97 rate limits setting 3 145 4 184 remote logging 4 63 restarting the system 3 46 4 30 RSTP 3 156 4 206 global configuration 3 158 4 206 S secure shell 3 84 4 46 Secure Shell configuration 3 84 4 51 4 52 s
192. SH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 ot 2 0 clients SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds 3 89 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 90 SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status F Enabled Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 1 00 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5
193. TERFACE address bitmask2 Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format vid VLAN ID Range 1 4094 vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4094 protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets e A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl Hpermit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 138 26 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 140 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 139
194. TigerSwitch 106 Gigabit Ethernet Switch 9408909000090 0 8 1OGBASE XFP slots Non blocking switching architecture Support for a redundant power unit Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MSTP Up to 4 LACP or static 8 port trunks Layer 2 3 4 CoS support through eight priority queues Layer 3 4 traffic priority with IP Precedence and IP DSCP Full support for VLANs with GVRP IGMP multicast filtering and snooping Support for jumbo frames up to 9 KB Manageable via console Web SNMP RMON SMC Management Guide sie SMC8708L2 Networks TigerSwitch 10G Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 38 Tesla May 2005 Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 Pub 1491000243004 Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or oth erwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2005 by SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Printed in Taiwan Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EZ Switch TigerStack and TigerSwitch are trademarks of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered
195. Version Remove Trap Security Level thNoPriv Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs Trap Inform Retry times 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps v Enable Link up and Link down Traps I la Figure 3 25 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps Console config Hsnmp server host 10 1 19 23 private version 2c udp port 162 4 155 Console config Hsnmp server enable traps authentication 4 158 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 3 58 To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID do so before configuring other SNMP parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level 1 e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting a Local Engine ID An SNMPvy3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to a
196. When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 194 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network 3 187 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 188 Aaa rara LA Port ba
197. a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule This is done by specifying masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule 3 105 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress
198. a Unit ha Port hy Trunk a Figure 3 96 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 1 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 14 276 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 277 VLAN M cast Router Port Type T Eth 1 1 Static Console Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e WLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast setvice e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service MULTICAST FILTERING Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 Multicast IP Address 2241112 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User Figure 3 97 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if
199. a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Glossary 5 GLOSSARY Quality of Service QoS QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide better service to selected traffic flows using features such as data prioritization queuing congestion avoidance and traffic shaping These features effectively provide preferential treatment to specific flows either by raising the priority of one flow or limiting the priority of another flow Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topolo
200. ace configuration mode description Adds a description to an interface IC 4 170 configuration speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of IC 4 171 a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 172 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface IC 4 173 for use in autonegotiation shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 174 switchport Configures the broadcast storm control IC 4 175 broadcast threshold packet rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 176 show interfaces Displays status for the specified interface NE 4 177 status PE show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE 4 178 counters PE show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational NE 4 180 switchport status of an interface PE This command is not supported 4 169 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 e vlan v an id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 4 enter the following command Console config ttinte
201. aces 1 RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id gt interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channel id Range 1 4 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree nterface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST 4 226 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Use the show spanning tree mst nstance_ d command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST e For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 163 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 168 4 227 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example
202. ach domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match If there is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used DNS CoMMANDS Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Console config Htip domain list sample com jp Console config H tip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 287 ip name server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address1 server address2 server address6 e server address1 IP address of domain name server e server address2 server address6 IP address of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response 4 289 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displ
203. acility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 BASIC CONFIGURATION The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See REC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List 3 41 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Logs Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status Disabled Logging Facility 16 23 23 Logging Trap 0 7 7
204. address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses 4 39 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 40 Example SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Console show management all c Management Ip Filter HTTP Client SNMP Client TELNET Client Start IP address End 1 192 168 1 19 192 2 192 168 1 25 192 Start IP address End 1 192 168 1 19 192 2 192 168 1 25 192 Start IP address End 1 192 168 1 19
205. agement access IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management 4 38 access Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 41 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 45 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 46 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 59 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 67 Time System Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP 4 72 Clock server or manually System Status Displays system configuration active managers and 4 78 version information Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 85 Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE GC 4 34 mode hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 34 4 33 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp setver Sets the system contact string GC 4 153 contact snmp setver Sets the system location string GC 4 154 location prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example
206. aight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device e This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 220 4 221 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree link type 4 222 This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to
207. ally detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 e Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 1000 trunk 500 3 183 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 y Port STA Stael sta be of 16 1 pec tor 1 Forwarding 128 2 Forwarding 128 fo 3 Discarding i28 booo 4 Discarding Boo 5 Discarding fize f Trunk E Figure 3 72 MSTP Port Configuration CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 4 4 170 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 4 219 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 4 218 Console config if VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs 3 184 In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into
208. amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media 3 171 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Spanning Forward Designated Designated Designated Opor Path Opor Oper Trunk Port tree STA Statusit ansitions Cost Bridge Port Cost Link Type Edge Port PO Role mombor 1 Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 000C0B211133 128 1 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 2 Enabled Discarding 0 O 32768 0 000COB211133 1282 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 3 Enabled Discarding 0 0 183 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding 0 0 1284 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding 0 0 1285 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 6 Enabled Discarding 0 0 128 6 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 7 Enabled Discard
209. an optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority POr 055535 0 65535 0 65535 La pzs if 32768 2 pes ih 32768 3 roves f 32768 5 foes fr pzs e fees sift 32768 7 pzs hi 32768 le E fi 52768 Figure 3 55 LACP Aggregation Port 3 133 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 134 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 6 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 and 6 ate set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 190 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 4 191 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 128 4 193 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if Htlacp actor admin key 120 Console config if Htlacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console show lacp sysid 4 194 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 3 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console s
210. and Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 121 4 177 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic Information Port Type 10G Mac Address 00 0C DB 21 11 3B Configuration Name Port Admin Up Speed duplex 10G full Capabilities Broadcast Storm Enabled Broadcast Storm Limit 1042 packets second LACP Disabled Port Security Disabled Max MAC Count 0 Port Security Action None Media Type None Current Status Link Status Up Port Operation Status Up Operation Speed duplex 10G full Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Information of VLAN 1 MAC Address Console 00 0C DB 21 11 33 show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channel id Range 1 4 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 178 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics
211. and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than four ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to four trunks on a switch with up to four 10Gbps ports per trunk e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports When configuri
212. arding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 188 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 3 189 Displaying Basic VLAN Information o o ooooommmm o 3 189 Displaying Current VLANs 00000 e eee eee eee 3 190 Creating VICAING 00 ts Pos ee BAe e fiance 3 192 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 194 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 196 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 197 Configuring Private VLANs 00 cece eee eee oo 3 200 Enabling Private VLANS 0 00 e eee ee eee 3 200 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 3 201 Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 0005 3 202 Configuring Protocol Groups 00 eee 3 203 Mapping Protocols to VLANS 00 0000 e eee eee 3 204 Class of Service Configuration 0 ccc cee eee 3 206 Layer 2 Queue Settings 6 eee eee 3 206 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 206 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues o o 3 208 Selecting the Queue Mode 0 00 eee 3 209 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 210 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings ustami a eee eee 3 212 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 212 Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 213 Mapping IP Precedence 0 cece eee eee 3 213 Mapping DSCP Priority 00 eee eee eee 3 215 Mapping IP Port Priority
213. as been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console 4 75 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 0 13 hours minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config cloc
214. ash memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 90 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 91 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 92 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the GC 4 93 system 4 86 FLasH FiLE COMMANDS copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site certificate public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server See Secure Shell Commands on
215. ast register with their local multicast switch router Although this CN ar casi approach reduces the network overhead required by a multicast server the es broadcast traffic must be carefully A pruned at every multicast switch router it _ E l Ce a Or passes through to ensure that traffic is UL UL Le C P only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN 3 221 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH IGMP Protocol The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP runs between hosts and their immediately adjacent multicast router switch IGMP is a multicast host registration protocol that allows any host to inform its local router that it wants to receive transmissions addressed to a specific multicast group A router
216. ay a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority the MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when spanning tree mode is set to MSTP page 3 163 and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before i
217. ays the list Console config ip domain server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 00 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 287 ip domain lookup 4 290 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Atleast one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS Ifall name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled 4 290 DNS COMMANDS Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config ip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192168155 10 1 0 55 Related Commands ip domain name 4 287 ip name server 4 289 show hosts This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55
218. cate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on MULTICAST FILTERING your switch page 3 227 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 229 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If the
219. ce precedence tos tos dscp dseh source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 4 123 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 e dsp DSCP priority level Range 0 63 sport Protocol source port number Range 0 65535 e dport Protocol destination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage e All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP pac
220. ce should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface 4 237 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add v an list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an i
221. ces Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 8 Numetics 802 1X port authentication 3 94 4 107 A acceptable frame type 3 197 4 234 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 106 4 117 4 119 4 123 MAC 3 106 4 117 4 137 4 138 4 141 Standard IP 3 106 4 117 4 119 4 122 address table 3 152 4 198 aging time 3 156 4 203 B BOOTP 3 22 4 279 BPDU 3 157 broadcast storm threshold 3 141 4 175 C Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 6 command line interface See CLI community string 2 10 3 53 4 153 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 12 3 30 4 87 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 206 4 252 DSCP 3 215 3 219 4 262 IP port priority 3 217 4 259 IP precedence 3 213 4 261 layer 3 4 priorities 3 212 4 259 INDEX queue mapping 3 208 4 256 queue mode 3 209 4 253 traffic class weights 3 210 4 255 D default gateway configuration 3 21 4 280 default priority ingress port 3 206 4 254 default settings system 1 7 DHCP 3 22 4 279 client 3 21 4 284 dynamic configuration 2 7 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DNS default domain name 3 231 4 287 displaying the cache 3 236 domain name list 3 231 4 285 enabling lookup 3 231 4 290 name server list 3 231 4 289 static entries 3 234 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 3 27 4 87 DSCP enabling 3 213 4 262 mapping priorities 3 215 3 219 4 26
222. cess list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console 4 143 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config access list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any
223. ch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802 1X including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts page 4 110 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 109 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 111 reauth petiod Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 112 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 112 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 113 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max teq Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 108 Status Authorization status authorized or not 4 114 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1X authorized port Max Count The maximu
224. ch the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config taccess list ip standard A2 Console config std acl Hpermit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 4 129 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 130 This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 69 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if Htip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console This shows how to crea
225. ch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 136 show marking This command displays the current configuration for packet marking Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show marking Interface ethernet 1 12 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console Related Commands match access list ip 4 135 4 136 MAC ACLs ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Table 4 36 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and entets GC 4 138 configuration mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified MAC ACL 4 139 source and destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac Displays the rules for configured MAC PE 4 141 access list ACLs access list mac Changes to the mode for configuring GC 4 141 mask precedence access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL MAC Mask 4 142 rules show access list Shows the ingress or egress rule masks PE 4 144 mac for MAC ACLs mask precedence mac access group Adds a port toa MAC ACL IC 4 145 show mac Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 145 access gtoup map access list Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 146 mac output queue f
226. cl mask host any 4 128 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring a MAC ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Use Any to match any address Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination Bit Mask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask Ethernet Type Bit Mask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask e Packet Format Mask A packet format must be specified in the rule 3 117 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Mask MAC Ingress Table Source Bitmask Destination Bitmask VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Mask 00 11 11 11 11 11 Any B Enabled Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any Source Bitmask D 0 0 Destinatio
227. config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 60 clear log 4 64 logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release 4 60 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 4 watnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware
228. config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 49 Console Port Security Commands 4 104 These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Table 4 31 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 105 mac address table Maps a static address to a port in a GC 4 199 static VLAN show Displays entries in the bridge forwarding PE 4 201 mac address table database port security This command
229. console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 lene VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 1 68 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s 1 HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None 4 84 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 16 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unit 1 Serial Number A000000022 Hardware Version ROL EPLD Version 1 00 Number of Ports 9 Main Power Status Up Redundant Power Status Not present Agent Master Unit ID al Loader Version 3 0 0 2 Boot ROM Version 3 0 0 6 Operation Code Version 3 0 0 4 Console Frame Size Commands Table 4 24 Frame Size Commands Co
230. copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are Configuration This file type stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup The file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system If the system is booted with the factory default settings the switch will also create a file named startupl cfg that contains all system settings including information about the unit identifier and MAC address The configuration settings from the factory defaults configuration file are copied to this file which is then used to boot the switch See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 30 for more information See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 30 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 25 for more information Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memoty the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many
231. correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 12 2 3 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Remote Connections 2 4 Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 Note You can manage the switch through the same IP address using any of the 10 Gigabit data ports Ports 1 8 or though the Fast Ethernet management port Port 9 The management port allows you to build a separate network for management tasks It acn also provide faster management access when the data ports are heavily loaded Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Intern
232. d Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear log Console Related Commands show log 4 66 show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 71 trap Displays settings for the trap function 4 64 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors 1 e default level 3 0 and the message level for RAM is debugging 1 e default level 7 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level debugging Console Table 4 19 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history FLASH command History
233. d from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or 3 157 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH more for STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTD the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings 3 158 You can displ
234. d outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port 3 152 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes e Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 13 Web Only 3 153 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Ponll y C Trunk MAC Address n gt VLAN fi Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 63 Static Addresses CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when th
235. d up to five recipient destination email addresses Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 4 68 Console config logging sendmail level 3 4 69 Console config logging sendmail source email big wheels matel com 4 69 Console config logging sendmail destination email chris matel com 4 70 Console config logging sendmail 4 71 Console config exit Console show logging sendmail 4 71 SMTP servers 92 168 1 4 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses chris matel com SMTP source email address big wheels matel com SMTP status Enabled Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset Figure 3 20 Resetting the System 3 46 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 4 30 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the
236. data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time ve no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds 4 209 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated port
237. ddress ocpcisirirs eee ee ees 2 6 Manual Configuration 0 6 0 6 eee eee 2 6 Dynamic Configuration 6 0 cece eee eee 2 7 Enabling SNMP Management Access 000 000 00 2 9 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 10 Tiap Receivers ret ortir cardos da 2 11 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 11 Saving Configuration Settings 0 1 2 0 0c eee eee eee 2 12 Managing System Piles 0 0 00 80 i e ee Pe bee a Bee el 2 13 Configuring the Switch ooooooomo o 3 1 Using the Web Interface riaa enaa E E A eee 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 1 0 0 0 0c cece eee ee 3 3 Home Page nn id A Abe Pee 3 3 Configuration Options sssssssss eee eee 3 4 Banesto 3 5 Mat Men da a a ad a dite 3 6 Basic Configuration entitats 3 14 Displaying System Information 000 eee eee 3 14 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 16 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities ooooo o o o 3 18 Setting the Switch s IP Address 1 2 eee eee eee 3 20 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manual Configuration n susse sensro reenn rre 3 22 Using DHCP BOOTP recoit iteko E 3 22 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames oooomo o oooo 3 24 Managing Firmware 11 0 eee ees 3 25 Downloading System Software from a Servet 3 27 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 30 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Servet 3 32 C
238. detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode 3 123 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic Information Port Type Mac Address Configuration Name Port Admin Speed duplex Capabilities Broadcast Storm Broadcast Storm Limit LACP Port Security Max MAC Count Port Security Action Media Type Current status Link Status Port Operation Status Operation Speed duplex Console 10G 00 0C DB 21 11 38 Up 10G full Enabled 1042 packets second Disabled Disabled 0 None None Up Up 10G full 4 177 3 124 PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed and duplex mode Note Interface settings for the management port can only be configured from the CLI Command Attributes Port Port number Range 1 8 Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been reso
239. diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows 2 13 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 14 In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connectio
240. dware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addtesses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Glossary 4 GLOSSARY MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wite or tadio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on
241. e A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs e The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 128 ip access group 4 132 4 127 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mask IP ACL This command defines a mask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask 4 128 Syntax no mask protocol any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmask destination port port bitmask control flag lag bitmask protocol Check the protocol field any Any address will be matched host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask precedence Check the IP precedence field tos Check the TOS field dscp Check the DSCP field source port Check the protocol source
242. e Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel 4 224 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config 1f Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 223 spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can 4 225 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interf
243. e appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses 24 Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 3 232 CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply General Configuration Domain Lookup Status Y Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk sample com jp lt lt Add Domain Name Remove Name Server List Current New m Name Server P Remove Figure 3 99 DNS General Configuration 3 233 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ttip domain name sample com 4 287 Console config tip domain list sample com uk 4 288 Console config tip domain list sample com jp Console config Htip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 289 Console config tip domain lookup 4 290 Console config end Console show dns 4 292 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name
244. e config snmp server priv des56 einstien Console config view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included group r amp d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d user steve r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 50 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4 150 Saving Configuration Settings 2 12 Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Write to FLASH finish Success Console Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming MANAGING SYSTEM FILES Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded
245. e in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port 4 132 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console config int eth 1 2 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 126 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 132 map access list ip This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list ip ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7
246. e root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 3 164 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time i
247. e 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue 21 CLI shows Queue ID 3 208 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Assign priorities to the traffic classes 1 e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class w ao nw gt R o P on B 7 4 07 5 07 5 07 P o Figure 3 85 Traffic Classes CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Cos Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso el el el el Value Priority Queue Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 config if queue cos map 0 0 4 256 config if queue cos map 1 1 config if queue cos map 2 2 e config if end e show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 258 Information of Eth 1 1 09012 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a 3 209 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 210 predefined relative weigh
248. e CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list mac interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list mac Access list to COS of Eth 1 5 Access list M5 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list mac 4 146 4 147 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE match access list mac This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list mac ac _name set priority priority no match access list mac ac _name e acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL tule Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list mac a set priority 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 136 4 148 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS ACL Information show access list
249. e appended to incomplete host names 1 e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 4 288 ip name server 4 289 ip domain lookup 4 290 4 287 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip domain list 4 288 This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Domain names ate added to the end of the list one at a time When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch it will work through the domain list appending e
250. e authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users r Name Group Name Engine ID Model Level Authentication Privancy Tim rad 80000000030004e2b316c54321 V3 noAuthNoPriv None None SNMPv3 Remote Users New SNMPV3 User User Name Group Name a C public z Remote IP 192 168 1 19 y Security Model vi y Security Level noAuthNoPri User Authentication Authentication Protocol mos E Authentication NAAA Password Data Privacy Privacy Protocol DES56 z Privacy Password C wt isS Y
251. e following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e Port Port identifier Range 1 8 STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Se e Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 168 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk The following interface attributes can be configured Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the active lin highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an k in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network oops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 16 STA Port Configuration onl
252. e following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version e 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 4 269 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 e Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 223 for a description of the displayed items 4 270 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Disabled Query count 2
253. e is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table 4 199 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console 4 200 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan v an id sort addres
254. e no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readvien write writevien notify notifyvien no snmp setvet group groupname groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters e v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 e auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 50 for further information about these authentication and encryption options readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters writeview Defines the view for write access 1 64 characters enotifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters Default Setting Default groups public read only private read write readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 writeview Nothing is defined notifyview Nothing is defined 27 No view is defined 28 Maps to the defaultview 4 163 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A group sets the access policy for the assigned users e When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command e When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption For additional information on the notification messages sup
255. e of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated tead view 4 165 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 42 show snmp group display description Continued Field Description writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status snimp setver user 4 166 The row status of this entry This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read Write or Notify View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user username groupname remote ip address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username v1 v2c v3 remote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ip address The Internet address of the remote device e v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input e auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication e md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication e auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minim
256. e region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 212 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Related Commands mst vlan 4 213 mst priority 4 214 name 4 215 revision 4 216 max hops 4 216 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst nstance_ d vlan vlan range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 vlan range Range of VLANs Range 1 4094 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 215
257. e switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 199 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk 3 154 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface WLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned e Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by Interface E Port fr C Trunk I MAC Address T VLAN Address Table Sort Key Address Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic
258. e switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 16K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memoty before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 256 KB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network
259. e the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 239 4 230 VLAN COMMANDS vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan v an id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan v an id name state e vlan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type e state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan v an id deletes the VLAN no vlan v an id name removes the VLAN name no vlan v an id state returns the VLAN to the default state 1 e active e You can configu
260. e vlan 1 4 170 Console config if tip address dhcp 4 279 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 281 Console show ip interface 4 282 IP Address and Netmask 192 168 1 58 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 Address Mode DHCP Console 3 23 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 281 Console Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames 3 24 The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9000 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields Command Usage To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the c
261. econds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config 4 202 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console 4 203 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Spanning Tree Commands 4 204 This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 54 Spanning Tree Commands hops allowed in the region before a BPDU is discarded Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 205 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 206 spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 208 forward time forward time spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge hello GC 4 209 hello time time spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 209 max age maximum age
262. ect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic Command Attributes Port Port number Range 1 8 e Trunk 2 Trunk number e Type Indicates the port type 10G e Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled e Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 1042 262143 packets per second Default 1042 pps Trunk Shows if port is a trunk member 11 Port Broadcast Control 12 Trunk Broadcast Control 3 141 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control or Trunk Broadcast Control Check the Enabled box for any interface set the threshold and click Apply Port Broadcast Control Type Protect Status Threshold 1042 262143 Trunk 10G I Enabled 1042 packets sec 10G M Enabled 6000 packets sec 10G MEnabled 1042 packets sec 10G M Enabled hoa packets sec 106 F Enabled 1042 packets sec 10G M Enabled fo packets sec i 106 fo packets sec 106 1044 packets sec Figure 3 59 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast sup
263. ed Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration nlelu nji a tion Max Count Re Operat Re Quiet Port Status Modo 120 Mode slo MaxReq Period ner Tx Period Authorized Supplicant Trunk Disabled Single Host y Force Unauthonzed 7 Enable 2 feo 2500 30 Ye Soe 0 01 Enabled Single Host ForceAvmonzed 3 r Enabiel2 feo 5500 po bape Disabled Single Host Force Autnonzed EMT Endi feo 3500 30 Pepo i Disabled Single Host Force Aumornzed Br Ensi feo fa500 20 Pro 0 00 0 Disabled Single Host Force Aithonzed E M Enable feo 3500 30 agree I y 0 0 Disabled Single Host 3 Force Authorizad Er Ensbielf2 feo 5500 30 egoera dl Figure 3 40 802 1X Port Configuration USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 4 113 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 170 Console config if dot1x port control auto 4 108 Console config if dot1lx re authentication 4 111 Console config if dot1lx max req 5 4 108 Console config if dotlx timeout quie
264. ed MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vd vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid wd vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address e host A specific MAC address e source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask 4 139 COMMAND LINE IN
265. ed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate 10000 Mbps Range 1 10000 Mbps Web Click Port Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 7 Enabled 50000 2 i I Enabled foo 3 l F Enabled ro000 la F Enabled foao 5 T Enabled fiocoo 6 I Enabled 10000 7 I Enabled 10000 8 F Enabled fioo Figure 3 61 Rate Limit Configuration 3 145 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 6000 Mbps Console config ttinterface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if rate limit input 6000 4 185 Console config if rate limit output 6000 Console config 1f Showing Port Statistics 3 146 You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet li
266. ee eee 4 150 show snmp engine id display description 4 161 show snmp view display description 4 163 show snmp group display description 4 165 show snmp user display description 4 168 Interface Commands 0 0 0 0 4 169 show interfaces switchport display description 4 181 Mirror Port Commands 000000005 4 182 Rate Limit Commands 000000 o 4 184 Link Aggregation Commands 0000008 4 186 show lacp counters display description 4 195 show lacp internal display description 4 195 show lacp neighbors display description 4 197 show lacp sysid display description 4 198 Address Table Commands 00000 4 198 Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 54 e 4 55 e 4 56 e 4 57 e 4 58 e 4 59 e 4 60 e 4 61 e 4 62 e 4 63 e 4 64 e 4 65 e 4 66 e 4 67 e 4 68 e 4 69 e 4 70 e 4 71 e 4 72 e 4 73 e 4 74 e B 1 TABLES Spanning Tree Commands 000000005 4 204 VEAN Comimands tices cloned jad ta 4 229 Editing VLAN Groups oocccccccccccccccccc 4 230 Configuring VLAN Interfaces o oooooomoo oo 4 232 Displaying VLAN Information ooooococoooo 4 239 Private VLAN Commands 00 0000 eee 4 240 Protocol based VLAN Commands 4 242 GVRP and Bridge
267. eee 3 84 Generating the Host Key Pair o ooooommmmo oo 3 87 Configuring the SSH Servet oooooccccocoommmo 3 89 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS Configuring Port Secutity oo oooooooooomomm mrmmm 3 91 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication o o o ooomoo 3 94 Displaying 802 1X Global Settings oooooooooo 3 95 Configuring 802 1X Global Settings ooo o 3 96 Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X oomo 3 97 Displaying 802 1X Statistics oooooooommmor rom 3 101 Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3 103 Access Control Dista A a a 3 105 Configuring Access Control Lists o oooo oooooommo o 3 105 Setting the ACL Name and Type 00 3 106 Configuring a Standard IP ACL 00000 3 107 Configuring an Extended IP ACL 04 3 108 Configuring a MAC ACL 6 eee eee eee 3 111 Configuring ACL Masks 00 cee eee eee eee 3 113 Specifying the Mask Type 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee 3 113 Configuring an IP ACL Mask ocooooococccoooo 3 114 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 00000 3 117 Binding a Port to an Access Control List oo o o o 3 119 Port Configuration itv dt Saeed lta ie caked Uae 3 121 Displaying Connection Status 06 0 cece eee eee 3 121 Configuring Interface Connections 00 00 ee 3 125 Creating Trunk Groups 6 06 c cece eee eee 3 127 Statically Configuring a Trunk
268. efault Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method e long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 218 takes precedence over port priority page 4 219 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config 4 211 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance Th
269. elated Commands exec timeout 4 19 show ip ssh 4 56 4 51 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 56 ip ssh server key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key s ze no ip ssh server key size Rey size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration 4 52 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type
270. eld If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match e any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a single node e source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field e vid bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask e ethertype Check the Ethernet type field ethertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None 4 142 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff f ff ff ff ff any vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC ac
271. enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config 1f Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 221 4 220 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed str
272. ent version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 4 155 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth Console config Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1d bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In 2 11 INITIAL CONFIGURATION the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server Console config snmp server Console config snmp server Consol
273. ent history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 66 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example The following example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 21 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page ogging sendmail SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 68 host ogging sendmail Severity threshold used to trigger alert GC 4 69 evel messages ogging sendmail Email address used for From field of alert GC 4 69 source email messages ogging sendmail Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 70 destination email ogging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 71 show logging Displays SMTP event handler settings NE 4 71 sendmail PE 4 67 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging sendmail host 4 68 This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host p_address
274. entries can be assigned to an ACL mask e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered e First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL 3 113 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit lP Ingress Edit lP Egress _Edit IMAC Ingress _Edit Imac Egress Edit Figure 3 47 Selecting ACL Mask Types CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 126 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 128 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring a
275. eout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel 4 112 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dotlx timeout tx period seconds no dotlx timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx timeout tx period 300 Console config if show dotlx This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dotlx statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dotlx status for each port interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 4 113 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 02 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the swit
276. er if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config Hsnmp server host 10 1 19 23 inform retries 10 timeout 30 batman version 2c udp port 162 Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 158 4 157 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications 4 158 Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snm
277. er the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input ENTERING COMMANDS Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 4 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL DHCP Interface Line Router VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dns dot1ix garp gvrp history hosts inte
278. erial port configuring 4 14 SNMP 3 50 community string 3 53 4 153 enabling traps 3 55 4 158 trap manager 3 55 4 155 software displaying version 3 16 4 84 downloading 3 27 4 87 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 84 4 51 4 52 STA 3 156 4 204 edge port 3 171 3 174 4 220 global settings configuring 3 163 4 205 4 212 global settings displaying 3 158 4 226 interface settings 3 168 3 180 3 182 4 218 4 225 4 226 link type 3 171 3 174 4 222 path cost 3 159 3 170 4 218 Index 3 INDEX path cost method 3 165 4 211 port priority 3 170 4 219 protocol migration 3 175 4 225 transmission limit 3 166 4 212 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 32 4 87 displaying 3 27 4 78 setting 3 27 4 93 static addresses setting 3 153 4 199 statistics port 3 146 4 178 STP 3 163 4 206 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 47 4 72 system software downloading from server 3 27 4 87 T TACACS logon authentication 3 77 4 102 time setting 3 47 4 72 traffic class weights 3 210 4 255 trap manager 2 11 3 55 4 155 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 127 4 185 LACP 3 130 4 185 4 188 static 3 128 4 187 Index 4 U upgrading software 3 27 4 87 user account 3 75 user password 3 75 4 36 4 37 V VLANs 3 184 3 201 4 229 4 241 adding static members 3 194 3 196 4 237 creating 3 192 4 231 description 3 184 displaying basic infor
279. ernal Configuration Information 3 136 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information 3 139 Port Statistics cueca bee eae eon begets a 3 146 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 208 CoS Priority Levels iii E oe 3 208 Mapping IP Precedence 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 3 214 Mapping DSCP Priority 0 00000 3 215 Egress Queue Priority Mapping 04 3 219 General Command Modes 0 000 000 ee 4 8 Configuration Command Modes 045 4 10 Keystroke Commands 000 cee 4 11 Command Group Index 0 000 4 12 Line Commands yi edi aaa bach ibaa cag sees 4 14 General Commands isna 0 0 eee eee ee eee 4 26 System Management Commands 04 4 33 Device Designation Commands o s ssns seene 4 33 User Access Commands ooocccocccccncccoc eee 4 35 Default Login Settings oooooooooooccoconmo 4 36 IP Filter Command S ssccc ici g ine id 4 38 Web Server Commands 00 00 c cece eee 4 41 HTTPS System Support 0000 eee eee eee 4 44 Telnet Server Commands 00 0 000005 4 45 Secure Shell Commands 0 0 00 00000 4 47 show ssh display description oooooooococmomo 4 56 TABLES xxii Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 17 e 4 18 e 4 19 e 4 20 e
280. ers AZ a z 0 9 6 9 _ Source Destination Unit3 Stack unit Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space 3 Stacking is not supported by this switch 3 31 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 32 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Choose tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Apply Copy tftp to startup config TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 Source File Name config startup Factory_Defautt_Config c g z Startup File Name Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu You can also se
281. erver as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 3 76 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839 71752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Clients Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 87 to copy a file containing the public key
282. es either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface 3 103 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH range Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a End IP Address The end address of a range Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter 1321681 19192 168 1 19 192 168 125 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP a Address p End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry Figure 3 42 IP Filter CLI This example restricts management access
283. es on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate e LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Console show lacp 1 neighbors Port channel 1 neighbors Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 51 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user
284. es with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic 4 207 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time 4 208 This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary
285. esenting the port bits to match Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer 3 109 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 110 For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extended ACL Name mike Destination Source Destination Control
286. essage has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 18 Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 3 198 VLAN CONFIGURATION Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID ate also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration GaRP GARP SARP Join Leave Timer Acceptable Ingress GVRP Time
287. essing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command gt q 4 1 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the 8 10GE L2 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management stati
288. et Telnet Status M Enabled Telnet Port Number 23 Login Timeout 0 300 300 secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 8 0 Disabled Figure 3 15 Configuring the Telnet Interface 5 CLI only 3 37 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 4 15 Console config line login local 4 16 Console config line password 0 secret 4 17 Console config line timeout login response 300 4 18 Console config line exec timeout 600 4 19 Console config line password thresh 3 4 20 Console config line end Console show line vty 4 25 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console Configuring Event Logging 3 38 The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in t
289. et Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software BASIC CONFIGURATION Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 At the Username prompt enter admin 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level
290. et server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet It also specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form without the port keyword to disable this function Use the no from with the port keyword to use the default port Syntax ip telnet server port port number no telnet server port port The TCP port number used by the Telnet interface port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting Server Enabled e Server Port 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tip telnet server Console config tip telnet port 123 Console config Secure Shell Commands 4 46 The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and rep remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
291. eue mode strict Console config switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default defau t priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used 4 254 PRIORITY COMMANDS e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports
292. faultview includes access to the entire MIB tree 4 161 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config Hsnmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config Hsnmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console 4 162 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 41 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use th
293. file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of configuration file or code image The colon is required Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A colon is required after the specified unit number and file type e If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 91 whichboot 4 92 4 93 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using TEEE 802 1X Table 4 27 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Defines logon authentication method and 4 94 Sequence precedence RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 97 RADIUS server TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 102 TACACS server Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 104 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports 4 107 using 802 1X Authentication Sequence Table 4 28 Authentication Sequence Commands Command Functio
294. followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 4 122 ip access group 4 132 show ip access list 4 126 access list ip extended fragment auto mask This command automatically creates extra masks to support fragmented ACL entries Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no access list ip extended fragment auto mask Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 121 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage If this feature is disabled fragmented packets will not be matched by any ACL rule and will be handled according to the default permit or deny rule Example Console config tacacs list ip extended fragment auto mask Console config permit deny Standard ACL 4 122 This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address e source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the li
295. for Telnet clients Console config management te Console config management te Console config exit Console show management all c Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address SNMP Client Start IP address TELNET Client Start IP address End 1 1 92 168 1 1 9 192 2 192 168 1 25 192 Console net client 192 168 1 19 4 39 net client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 ient 4 40 P address 3 104 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to
296. g if tport security action trap and shutdown 4 105 Console config if port security max mac count 20 Console config if port security Console config if 3 93 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 3 94 Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiting users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible re Authentication 802 1x client Protocol over LANs EE EAPOL to 1 Client attempts to access a switch port exchange 2 Switch sends client an identity request E RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information authentication server 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client acce
297. ge 3 172 i e true ot false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles ate assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge 1 e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R A Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated ort R R j A y D G B Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI 3 170 Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be
298. ger Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages Trap Manager Community String Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page for Version 1 or 2c clients or define a corresponding User Name in the SNMPv3 Users page for Version 3 clients Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager Trap Version Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Trap Security Level When trap version 3 is selected you must specify one of the following security levels Default noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Trap Inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default t
299. ghts from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write y Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 153 Console config SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as SMC EliteView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Usage If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the Trap Manager Community String is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use V3 authentication or encryption options authNoPriv or authPriv the user name must first be defined in the SNMPv3 Users page page 3 61 Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the no authentication noAuth option an SNMP user account will
300. gin authentication sequence Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled POST result Shows results of the power on self test BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet 8 10GE L2 Switch Manager System Name Object 1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 47 f ILocation Contact System Up Time O days O hours 16 minutes and 6 74 seconds LEE Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical support e Il Connect to SMC Web Site Figure 3 3 System Information 3 15 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 4 34 Console config snmp server location WC 9 4 154 Console config snmp server contact Ted 4 153 Console config exit Console show system 4 83 System Description 8 10GE L2 Switch System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 76 System Information System Up Time 0 days 4 hours 5 minutes and 56 31 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC Address Unitl 00 0C DB 21 11 33 Web Server Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Por
301. gure 3 35 SSH Host Key Settings ooooooocooommmmmm rm 3 88 Figure 3 36 SSH Server Settings 00 eee 3 90 Figure 3 37 Port Security 6 eee eens 3 93 FIGURES Xxvi Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 802 1X Global Information oooooomomomo o o 3 95 802 1X Global Configuration o o oooooommm 3 96 802 1X Port Configuration 00 cee eee 3 98 802 1X Port Statistics ooooooomomommm eee 3 102 IP a AS Ae 3 104 Selecting ACL Type p e ati cece cece cee 3 107 ACL Configuration Standard IP 3 108 ACL Configuration Extended IP 3 110 ACL Configuration MAC 6 eee eee 3 112 Selecting ACL Mask Types 0 000000 eee 3 114 ACL Mask Configuration IP ooo oooo 3 116 ACL Mask Configuration MAC 4 3 118 ACL Port Binding its att a ia 3 120 Port Port Information o ooooooooomommooo 3 122 Port Port Configuration 0 00 eee ee eee 3 126 Static Trunk Configuration 0 00 3
302. gures a port s IC Ethernet 4 191 administration key lacp admin key Configures an port channel s IC Port 4 192 administration key Channel lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port IC Ethernet 4 193 priority Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces Shows trunk information NE PE 4 177 status port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 194 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to four ports e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including VLAN assignments and CoS settings Any of the 10 Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together including ports of different media types 4 186 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP system priority e Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port cha
303. gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 247 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 189 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 18 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console 4 248 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration E
304. gy changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Glossary 6 GLOSSARY Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmis
305. haracters 4 57 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 58 Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users ate displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 65537 13236940658254764031382795526536375927835525327972629521130241 0719421061655759424590939236096954050362775257556251003866130989393 8345231033280214988866192159556859887989191950588394018138744046890 8779160305837768185490002831341625008348718449522087429212255691665 6552963281635169640408315547660664151657116381 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV yrDbKStIlnzD Dg0h2HxcYV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUWa4PAtp1KMSdgsKeh3hKoA3VRRSy1N2 XFfAKx15fwFfvJlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPJBrRA AAAFOChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrNLaQ77isiwAAATEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY418cCZ vH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y31R2G395NLy50d7ZDxfA9mCOf TyyEfbobMJZi80oGCstSNO xrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm
306. heir facility to SMC SMC is responsible for return shipping charges from SMC to customer WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION AT SMC S OPTION THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIMITED WARRANTY vi LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS SMC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE LOSS OF BUSINESS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE P
307. how interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol PE 4 246 protocol vlan group and the corresponding VLAN protocol group To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 231 Although not mandatoty we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command General Configuration mode VLAN COMMANDS 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command Interface Configuration mode protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id add remove frame type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vlan protocol group group id e group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 llc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the llc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp ratp Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode G
308. how lacp 1 internal 4 194 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 8 LACP Port Counters Parameter Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Number of valid LACPDUs received by this channel group Received Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group Marker Unknown Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Interface Port 2
309. hreshold are dropped e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 1043 Console config if 4 175 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 176 INTEREACE COMMANDS show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status in erface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Comm
310. iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtnylwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ 8 rMccXTxHLFAczWS7Ej OyDbs1oBf PuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLOkT LZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF Dj KGWt PNIQgqabKgYCw2o0dVzx4Gg yqdT1YmGA7f HGm 8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Event Logging Commands Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page ogging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 59 ogging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch GC 4 60 memory based on severity ogging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will GC 4 61 receive logging messages ogging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of GC 4 62 syslog messages ogging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote GC 4 63 server based on severity clear log Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 64 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 64 show log Displays log messages PE 4 66 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored 4 59 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console
311. ia the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP interface vlan IP address and netmask 10 1 0 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode Dhcp Console 4 281 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands ip address 4 279 show ip interface This command displays the settings for the switch s IP interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP Address and Netmask 192 168 1 58 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 Address Mode DHCP Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 282 show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 280 4 282 ping IP INTERFACE COMMANDS This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host count cound size size host
312. ial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 269 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 274 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 275 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 269 Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 71 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Adds a multicast router port GC 4 276 vla
313. ically take over when a primary link goes down SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops gt Designated SR o Root ay gt PL x SS X Designated x Root Ze Y o N cy _ Designated Port E ON ON A _ Bridge Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitte
314. ication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively LINE COMMANDS no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 36 password 4 17 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password e 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password Character string that
315. iguration Ethernet Ports 1 8 destination port 4 182 MIRROR Port COMMANDS Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner e The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface e The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 8 Console config interface ethernet 1 8 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config 1f show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor nterface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 183 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 t
316. imers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Example Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config 1f Related Commands show gatp timer 4 251 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 250 4 251 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered
317. in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lowet priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 62 Priority Commands Command Function Page Groups Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets 4 252 queue weights and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP 4 259 and 4 tags to class of service values Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 63 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or GC 4 253 Weighted Round Robin WRR switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged IC 4 254 default frames queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority IC 4 255 queues queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority IC 4 256 queues show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 257 show queue Shows round robin weights assigned to the PE 4 258 bandwidth priority queues 4 252 PRIORITY COMMANDS Table 4 63 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page show queue Sh
318. in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config BASIC CONFIGURATION file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit to file Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid charact
319. ing The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access tights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessaty VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a swi
320. ing 0 0 128 7 1000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 8 Enabled Forwarding 1 0 1288 1000 Point to Point Disabled Designated Figure 3 68 STA Port Information CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 226 Eth 1 5 information Admin status Role State External admin path cost nternal admin cost External oper path cost nternal oper path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console enabled disable discarding 1000 1000 1000 1000 128 0 128 5 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 32768 0 0030F1D473A0 disabled 2 disabled disabled auto point to point enabled Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or 3 172 shared media SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes Th
321. ing tables is indicated by these abbreviations PE Privileged Exec VC VLAN Database Configuration NE Normal Exec MST Multiple Spanning Tree GC Global Configuration LC Line Configuration IC Interface Configuration ACL Access Control List Configuration Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and GC 4 15 starts the line configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 16 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 17 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a LC 4 18 response login attempt exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter LC 4 19 waits until user input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which LC 4 20 limits the number of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management LC 4 21 console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that LC 4 22 are interpreted and generated by hardware 4 14 line LINE COMMANDS
322. inks Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 5 6 4 240 Console config end Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 3 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Console Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 3 202 The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 3 192 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign toa VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appr
323. iple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any 4 31 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 32 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS System Management Commands These commands ate used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands Command Function Page Group Device Configures information that uniquely identifies this 4 33 Designation switch User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for 4 35 man
324. is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight8 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight8 The ratio of weights for queues O 7 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 are assigned to queues 0 7 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights 4 255 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Console config if Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 258 queue cos map This command assigns class of service C
325. ived Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to Packets be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that wete discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no
326. k timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 75 4 76 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 min Minute Range 0 59 e sec Second Range 0 59 day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2100 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 77 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2002 System Status Commands Table 4 23 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show Displays the contents of the configuration file PE 4 78 startup config stored in flash memory that is used to start up the system show Displa
327. ke MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC EliteView Table 3 11 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to Packets a highet layer protocol Received Multicast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a Packets higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a Packets higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Rece
328. ket entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned e You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified e The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 25 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 124 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e
329. l 0 000000 e ee 4 192 hcp port priority esis ser eeu eae Seat Se eee tS 4 193 SHOW lap ior Laid sdb anit E nat nants hed Sits eh ane 4 194 Address Table Commands sesser sosu esser eee a es 4 198 mac address table static oooooooocooooommmm r rro 4 199 clear mac address table dynamic 00000 4 200 show mac address table 0 0 nunun aruna 4 201 mac address table aging time ooooooccccocoormmm 4 202 show mac address table aging time oooooomocccoomo 4 203 Spanning Tree Commands 6 eee eee 4 204 SPANMINS treSsi A Stee tpi ai 4 205 spanning tree Mode 1 6 6 ee eee eee 4 206 spanning tree forward time 0 eee eee eee 4 208 spanning tree hello time 0 eee eee 4 209 spamning tree Max age 6 eee eee 4 209 spanning tree priority 6 6 eee eee eee 4 210 spanning tree pathcost method 00 ee eee eee 4 211 spanning tree transmission limit 00 c ee eee 4 212 spanning tree mst configuration 0 eee eee eee 4 212 MSE VAI a A theta athe aL e DoS Sado 4 213 A A EN 4 214 MAME Aa Ae NA A IDE saat net 4 215 PELO A e a a Mig elt 4 216 Mix Ops tt AR O al Mesh Sed 4 216 spanning tree spanning disabled oooooooccccooo 4 217 Spaniling treeicOst cia ue eae See 4 218 spanning tree port priority 6 eee eee 4 219 spanning tree edge port 6 6 eee eee eee 4 220 spanning tree portfast 6 ee cece 4 221 spanning tree link type 2 6 eee eee
330. l must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable 802 1X globally for the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1 System Authentication Control IV Enabled Figure 3 39 802 1X Global Configuration CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dot1ix system auth control 4 108 Console config USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Default Disabled Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options A
331. l destination email ted this company com Console config SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 192 168 1 19 SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted this company com SMTP source email address billethis company com SMTP status Enabled Console 4 71 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 22 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 72 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 73 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for GC 4 74 time show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration set
332. le VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 55 VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and 4 230 Groups state Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including 4 232 Interfaces ingress and egress tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and 4 239 Information MAC addresses Configuring Private Configures private VLANs including uplink and 4 240 VLANs downlink ports Configuring Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame 4 242 Protocol VLANs type and protocol 4 229 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 56 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Entets VLAN database mode to add GC 4 230 change and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name VC 4 231 and state vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Us
333. le password 4 37 disable 4 28 This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 27 GENERAL COMMANDS configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 31 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands 4 29 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
334. lect any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Management Set Start Up page BASIC CONFIGURATION Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 455 startup Config_ File N 979 C startupt cfg Config_File Y 979 v3001 Operation Code N 8152916 v3002 Operation CodelY 8152916 Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 87 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup 4 93 Console config exit Console reload 4 30 Console Port Settings You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication
335. lnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session 1d session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 56 show users 4 84 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet 4 25 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times nteractive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times nteractive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 27 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 28 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 29
336. lobal Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config 32 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 4 243 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan vlan id no protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vlan id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 4 231 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the fra
337. logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history RAM command The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console 4 65 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 20 show logging trap display description facility type Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging status trap command REMOTELOG _ The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility command server IP address REMOTELOG _ The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote level type server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 71 show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory Syntax show log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory 1 e permanent memoty e ram Ev
338. logies At that point the obsolete product is discontinued and is no longer an Active SMC product A list of discontinued products with their respective dates of discontinuance can be found at http www smc com index cfm action customer_setvice_warranty All products that are replaced become the property of SMC Replacement products may be either new or reconditioned Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30 day limited warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty whichever is longer SMC is not responsible for any custom software or firmware configuration information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any warranty Products returned to SMC should have any customer installed accessory or add on components such as expansion modules removed prior to returning the product for replacement SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning any product to SMC Proof of purchase may be required Any product returned to SMC without a valid Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package will be returned to customer at customer s expense For warranty claims within North America please call our toll free customer support number at 800 762 4968 Customers ate responsible for all shipping charges from t
339. lue in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS 1 IP Precedence 2 CoS2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Service Value 0 7 0 Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 3 89 IP Precedence Priority 3 214 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 4 261 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4 261 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 4 265 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 2 Eth 1 1 3 3 Eth 1 1 4 4 Eth 1 1 5 5 Eth 1 1 6 6 Eth 1 1 7 7 Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices
340. lved You may also disable an interface for security reasons Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled This is fixed at 10G full duplex for Ports 1 8 Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed and mode The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 10Gfull Supports 10 Gbps full duplex operation Default Disabled for Ports 1 8 enabled for Port 9 Advertised capabilities for Ports 1 8 10Gfull Port 9 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 10 The settings for this parameter cannot be changed 3 125 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 127 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Speed
341. m number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 110 Port control Shows the dotlx mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 109 Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 4 115 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 7 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized yes 1 8 enabled Single Host Auto yes 802 1X Port Details 80
342. mand Modes 0000 e ee 4 8 Exec Commands ei E inde eee a A 4 8 Configuration Commands 0oooccccccocconocccccc 4 9 Command Line Processing 0 0 eee ee eee ee 4 11 Command Groups anda tien ecto A S 4 12 Line Commands A oe RE SA 4 14 A A A AE teh Ree eS 4 15 LR acest uel RMR A dd 4 16 PASS mordido Redes 4 17 xi TABLE OF CONTENTS xii timeout login response 1 1 6 cece eee 4 18 EXEC DEOU uds tad lia ed BA Sie hate De dea et 4 19 password thresh yisi Aa a cee eee eens 4 20 SENEDE A Seis olathe So O pn Gas 4 21 datablts tati si DAA hy Ae 4 22 A A O AR ERA ES CONEA 4 23 perdia do e sia ce 4 23 SOPDES Ra e Oa ai et ih 4 24 disCOMME Cid did tone an 4 25 show Inert 40 a iii 4 25 General Command id a SA eed Aoi 4 26 al e nda Saad O o o 4 27 disable ss da 4 28 conter db 4 29 show historia an cides Sob siege eed 4 29 reload as nt a Sats a MMI Foden hy a Mes Fine a hn Saat Ng 4 30 CMS 5 ani ties aah Auta cuando ein E Shee Siac Aa 4 31 A E AD hace ee a Al end SE E 4 31 JU O aera ences 4 32 System Management Commands 0 eee e cece eee 4 33 Device Designation Commands 00 0000 rren 4 33 prompt 8 RS EI dl Ds 4 34 hostia adas tddi SE A N 4 34 User Access Commands saunus snurr rnnr rrearen 4 35 A E A E heh ea an 4 36 enable password 1 0 0 60 cece ccc eee eee 4 37 IP Filter Command iia sd 4 38 MAN APE MEN tavern a tise Set ath a Masai ata Ab 4 39 show management 6 eee eee 4 4
343. mand sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server 77 7p2 2p3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None 4 73 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 72 sntp poll 4 74 show sntp 4 75 sntp poll 4 74 This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config H Hsntp poll 60 Console config Related Commands sntp client 4 72 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time h
344. mand to create VLAN groups e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Command Modes Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 14 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 117 Control access list ip extended Console config ext acl List access list ip mask precedence Console config ip mask acl access list mac Console config mac acl access list mac Console config mac mask acl mask precedence Interface interface ethernet port Console config if 4 169 port channel d vlan id VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 229 MSTP spanning tree Console config mstp 4 212 mst configuration ENTERING COMMANDS For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config
345. mation 3 189 4 248 displaying port members 3 190 4 239 egress mode 3 199 4 233 interface configuration 3 197 4 234 4 238 private 3 200 4 240 protocol 3 202 4 242 W Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 4 home page 3 3 menu list 3 6 panel display 3 5 FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week 800 SMC 4 YOU 949 679 8000 Fax 949 679 1481 From Europe Contact details can be found on www smc europe com or www smc com INTERNET E mail addresses techsupportOsmc com european techsupport smc europe com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com http www smc europe com FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE CALL U S A and Canada Spain UK France Italy Benelux Central Europe Nordic Eastern Europe Sub Saharian Africa North West Africa CIS PRC Taiwan Asia Pacific Korea Japan Australia India 800 SMC 4 YOU 34 91 352 00 40 44 0 1932 866553 33 0 41 38 32 32 39 0 335 5708602 31 33 455 72 88 49 0 89 92861 0 46 0 868 70700 34 93 477 4920 216 712 36616 34 93 477 4920 7 095 7893573 86 10 6235 4958 886 2 8797 8006 65 6 238 6556 82 2 553 0860 81 45 224 2332 61 2 8875 7887 91 22 8204437 Fax 949 679 1481 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 Fax 33 0 4
346. me is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface 4 244 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console 4 245 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8
347. me servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Service Parameters Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client 1 e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used 3 231 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines a list of domain names that can b
348. minating bad frames Spanning Tree Supports standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Algorithm and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Prioritization Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Multicast Supports IGMP snooping and query Filtering DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Untagged port based tagged and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured
349. mmand Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 85 jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 85 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 4 83 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 25 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to PE 4 87 or from fl
350. motely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured e Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using eight priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data SYSTEM DEFAULTS This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with
351. move 2 Console config if VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP tegistration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN
352. mp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters 4 153 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 154 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location ex no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 153 4 154 SNMP COMMANDS snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr inform retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port por no snmp server host host addr host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries sinform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3
353. n Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Defaults admin and guest New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user 3 75 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account enter the user name access level and password then click Add To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new passwotd confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account User Name mike lt lt Add Access Level Noma Remove Password pe 7 Confirm Password p admin Privileged guest Normal Change Password lUser Name New Password Confirm Password Change Figure 3 32 User Accounts CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 1 e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 36 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon A
354. n Switch Information Main Board Serial Number 000000022 Number of Ports 9 Hardware Version IROI intemal Power Status Active Management Software EPLD Version 1 00 Loader Version 3 0 0 2 Boot ROM Version 3 0 0 6 Operation Code Version 3 0 0 4 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information 3 17 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 84 Unit 1 Serial Number A000000022 Hardware Version R01 EPLD Version 1 00 Number of Ports 9 Main Power Status Up Redundant Power Status Not present Agent Master Unit ID at Loader Version 30 10 32 Boot ROM Version 3 0 0 6 Operation Code Version 3 0 0 4 Console Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol e Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 206 e Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresse
355. n BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 5 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 3 1 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 2 2 If you log into the web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest passwotd If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 172 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and stati
356. n Address Type Any Destination Bitmask l 0 0 0 00 00 VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Mask I Enabled Ja Figure 3 49 ACL Mask Configuration MAC 3 118 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS CLI This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 4 138 Console config mac acl permit any any 4 139 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff f ff ff ff ff any vid 3 4 139 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 4 141 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 4 141 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 4 142 Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 4 170 Console config if mac access group M4 in 4 145 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you should bind them to the ports that need to filter traffic You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress
357. n IP ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to 3 114 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS specify a host address not a subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any Source Destination Subnet Mask Soutce or destination address of rule must match this bitmask See the description for SubMask on page 3 107 Protocol Mask Check the protocol field Service Type Mask Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS Source Destination Port Bit Mask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 Control Code Bit Mask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 3 115 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port s or T
358. n Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method GC 4 95 and precedence authentication enable Defines the authentication method and GC 4 96 precedence for command mode change 4 94 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available
359. n Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Max Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 15 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 166 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State iv Enabled Spanning Tree Type l MSTP 32768 Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 le seconds Maximurn Age 6 40 eo seconds Forward Delay 4 30 fi 5 seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long y Transmission Limit 1 10 E MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 65 Configuration Digest 0xAC36177F50283CD4B83821 DBAB26DE62 Region Revision 65535 0 00 00 es aa 8 00 a Max Hop Count 1 40 Figure 3 67 STA Global Configuration 3 167 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso
360. n if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Spanning STA State paa aos of 16 o ohana Admin Link Type hepa ail Migration Trunk Pa enabled Forwarding i126
361. n mrouter show ip igmp Shows multicast router ports PE 4 277 snooping mrouter ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan v an id mrouter interface vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 gt interface ethernet wit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channel id Range 1 4 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured 4 276 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 1 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 1 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command M
362. n seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 3 165 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST Regio
363. n the TFTP server Consolettcopy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console FLasH FiLE COMMANDS The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password k Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP addre
364. n to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 128 and 3 130 USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 None MEnabled None MEnabled None El MEnabled None j D Enabled Trap and Shutdown M Enabled None Tl Enabled None x MEnabled None El Enabled TTT Orn in njaj Win Figure 3 37 Port Security CLI This example selects the target port sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port specifies a maximum address count and then enables port security for the port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console confi
365. n use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Notes Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set to any of the following baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 14 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal
366. nagement agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as SMC EliteView 2 1 INITIAL CONFIGURATION The switch s web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for any VLAN Configure SNMP parameters Enable disable any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing Configure up to 4 static or LACP trunks Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Required Connections 2 2 The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You ca
367. nd flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDIX pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 9 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 9 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 173 speed duplex 4 171 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation31 Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100hal 100full 31 The settings for this parameter cannot be changed 4 173 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex command Example The following example
368. ndicated sequence RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings ServerIndex Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters USER AUTHENTICATION Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Note The local switch user database has to be
369. ndows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 83 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 87 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 44 copy tftp https certificate 4 87 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS Range 1 65535 4 44 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 43 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 14 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4 42 configured from Telnet also specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface 4 45 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip teln
370. net half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 e 10 Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel 4 223 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 224 spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst nstance_ d port priority imstance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mod
371. ng querier 4 272 This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use t disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage he no form to If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config Console config ip igmp snooping querier MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10
372. ng static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard 3 127 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 128 The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including VLAN assignments and CoS settings Any of the 10 Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together including ports of different media types All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you f f statically may not be able to link switches of configured different types depending on the A manufacturers implementation A However note that the static trunks active on this switch are Cisco links EtherChannel compatible To avoid creating a loop in the MALA AA network be sute you add a static trunk v a the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 4 Port Port identifier Range 1 8 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port
373. ng version 2 4 269 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 270 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console 3 225 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes WLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 Multicast Router List Unitl Port11 Static Figure 3 95 Multicast Router Port Information 3 226 MULTICAST FILTERING CLI This example shows that P
374. nge 5 25 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout MULTICAST FILTERING Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status Enabled Act as IGMP Querier IT Enabled IGMP Query Count 2 10 R IGMP Query Interval 60 125 fie seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 25 10 seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds IGMP Version 1 2 2 Figure 3 94 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 268 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 272 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 273 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 274 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 274 Console config ip igmp snoopi
375. nnel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed 1 e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group e Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 4 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 4 187 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk e Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 8 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 8 Console config if channel group 1 Console config 1f lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the n
376. normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 32 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled 1 7 INTRODUCTION 1 8 Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec Password super from Normal Exec Level RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web HTTP Server Enabled Management Terr Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP SNMP Agent Enabled Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Au
377. nsmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Internal MAC Receive A count of frames for which reception on a particular Errors interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames
378. nterface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface 4 238 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config tinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 58 Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 239 show interfaces Displays status for the specified VLAN NE PE 4 177 status vlan interface show interfaces Displays the administrative and NE PE 4 180 switchport operational status of an interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name v an name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANSs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 239 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Console Configuring Private
379. o 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 20 4 21 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character e 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line tdatabits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 23 4 22 LINE COMMANDS parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity e even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command
380. o CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Hmap ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config 1f show map ip port This command shows the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 264 PRIORITY COMMANDS Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 259 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 260 show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 265 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 g ig Eth 1 5 Teci Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3p 623 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 505 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 261 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 261
381. o form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 188 Example LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS The following shows LACP enabled on ports 6 8 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console config tinterface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 7 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 8 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port Type Mac Address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Port security Max MAC co
382. o port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination Port listen port Eth1 8 Source Port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands 4 184 This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 47 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output IC 4 185 rate for a port LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output raze no rate limit input output input Input rate output
383. oS values to the priority queues e hardware output queues 0 7 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map gueue_id cos cosn no queue cos map e queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 4 64 Default CoS Priority Levels Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 4 256 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port e This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 e config interface ethernet 1 1 config if queue cos ma
384. ocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPvy3 first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 39 SNMP Commands notification operation Command Function Mode Page snmp setver Enables the SNMP agent GC 4 151 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP NE PE 4 152 communications snmp server Sets up the community access string to GC 4 153 community permit access to SNMP commands snmp server Sets the system contact string GC 4 153 contact snmp setver Sets the system location string GC 4 154 location snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP GC 4 155 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 39 SNMP Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp server enable Enables the device to send SNMP traps GC 4 158 traps i e SNMP notifications snmp server Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 4 159 engine id show snmp Shows the SNMP engine ID PE
385. ode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static 4 277 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type Eth 1 11 Static IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration Table 4 72 Basic IP Configuration Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 279 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which an GC 4 280 in band management station can reach this device ip dhep restart Submits a BOOTP or DCHP client request PE 4 281 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 282 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for PE 4 282 this device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another NE 4 283 node on the network PE 4 278 IP
386. of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e ds p value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 63 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 67 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 4 5 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 6 46 56 7 4 263 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 t
387. of addresses to the default e You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command e A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port e Ifa port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 174 mac address table static 4 199 show mac address table 4 201 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 32 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dotlx Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 4 108 system auth control dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default GC 4 108 values dotlx max req Sets the maximum number of times that the IC 4 108 switch retransmits an EAP request identity
388. of service IC 4 260 map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service GC 4 261 mapping map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of service IC 4 261 map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 262 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 263 show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 264 show map ip Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 265 precedence show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 266 map ip port Global Configuration This command enables IP port mapping 1 e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 259 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config map ip port Interface Configuration This command sets IP port priority i e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration
389. ols Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active 1 e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 125 Unit fis SMC OOM OO MNS OOM OOM O O O OO OO Mode Active X gi H tnk Up Iil Link Down Figure 3 2 Panel Display 1 There are interoperability problems between Flow Control and Head of Line HOL blocking for the switch ASIC Flow Control is therefore not supported for this switch 3 5 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage 3 6 and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 14 System Information Provides basic system description incl
390. omain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAIN The domain name associated with this record clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 4 293 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 294 APPENDIX SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC up to 32 lists DHCP Client DNS Server Port Configuration RJ 45 100BASE TX 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex XFP 10GBASE SR LR ER 10 Gbps at full duplex Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Algorithm Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s 33 Management port only supports auto negotiation 34 Data ports only support 10 Gbps full duplex A 1 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS VLAN Su
391. on and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty 7 prompt for the administrator
392. only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments 14 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 3 163 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basie Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s MSTP is the default e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root devic
393. onnection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Command Attributes Jumbo Packet Status Configures support for jumbo frames Default Disabled BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Jumbo Frames Enable or disable support for jumbo frames and click Apply Jumbo Frames Jumbo Packet Status Y Enabled Figure 3 8 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames CLI This example enables jumbo frames globally for the switch Console config jumbo frame 4 85 Console config Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the
394. opriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring Protocol Groups Create a protocol group for one or mote protocols Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Frame Type Frame type used by this protocol Options Ethernet RFC_1042 LLC_other Protocol Type The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP RARP Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Enter a protocol group ID frame type and protocol type then click Apply Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New Group 1 Ethernet 08 00 p I ID 1 2147483647 Group 1 Ethernet 08 06 lt lt Add a roe er Cae dL n Frame Type Ethernet Remove zt Protocol Type IP h Figure 3 82 Protocol VLAN Configuration CLI The following creates protocol group 1 and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip 4 243 Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config 19 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 3 203 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 204 Mapping Protocols to VLANs Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will
395. or packets matching an ACL tule show map Shows CoS value mapped to an access PE 4 147 access list mac list for an interface match access list Changes the 802 1p priority of a frame IC 4 148 mac matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 136 packet marking 4 137 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 139 mac access group 4 145 show mac access list 4 141 4 138 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specifi
396. orbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config 1f 4 235 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport native vlan 4 236 This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan v an id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example show
397. orisole Port Settings ii De 3 33 Felner Senes ssa aid ots Astute Sys ated ea E TARAA 3 36 Configuring Event Logging 0 0 0 eee eee 3 38 System Log Configuration 1 0 0 0 6 rsrsrsrs 3 38 Remote Log Configuration oooooccccocoonoom 3 40 Displaying Log Messages 6 000000 cece eee eee 3 43 Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts 3 44 Resetting the System simio a a toe 3 46 Setting the System Clock 0 0 6 cc cc ccc ee eee 3 47 Contisurino SNEP 2225 20 dad 3 47 Setting the Time Zone 2 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 3 49 Simple Network Management Protocol 0 000 c cee 3 50 Enabling the SNMP Agent 00 cece eee 3 53 Setting Community Access Strings oooooocoocooomooo 3 53 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 55 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 044 3 58 Setting a Local Engine ID 00 3 59 Specifying a Remote Engine ID ooooomommoo 3 60 Configuring SNMPv3 Users ooooccccocooomom 3 61 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Usets ooooommm 3 63 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 0 00 e eee eee 3 66 Setting SNMPv3 Views 0 eee 3 72 User Authentic da ads le ea 3 74 Configuring User Accounts 6 6 cece eee eee 3 75 Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 76 Contouring HEIPS ita dane ea ee a eae 3 81 Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate 3 83 Configuring the Secure Shell 1 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee ee
398. ort 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 270 VLAN M cast Router Port Type pl Eth 1 11 Static Console Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list WLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router 3 227 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 228 Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vian Unitl Pori Interface Port y TIE Me
399. ows the class of service map PE 4 258 cos map show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational PE 4 180 switchport status of an interface queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 7 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the 4 253 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config qu
400. p name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 216 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 216 4 215 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE tevision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 215 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge 1 e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 215
401. p 0 0 config if queue cos map 1 1 config if queue cos map 2 2 e config if end e show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 es el ed ef Related Commands show queue cos map 4 258 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Conso Queue Conso le show queue mode Mode wrr le 4 257 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight YHNHUPWNFO show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None 4 258 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234567 Priority Queue 20134567 Console Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 65 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service mapping GC 4 259 map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class
402. p server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts recetve SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp server group command page 4 163 SNMP COMMANDS Example Console config Hsnmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp setver host 4 155 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote 7p address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote 7p address y local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ip address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 1 26 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC addtess Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay
403. page 4 211 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config tinterface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config 1f spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 218 4 219 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e You can
404. page 4 234 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 236 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 252 GVRP status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 249 Allowed VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 237 Forbidden VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 238 4 181 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 46 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 182 show port Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 183 monitor port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor nterface rx tx both no port monitor nterface interface ethernet unit port source port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Conf
405. participate in the group Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces using this configuration screen If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN menus such as the VLAN Static Table page 3 194 or VLAN Static Membership by Port menu page 3 196 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard tules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Command Attributes Interface Port 1 8 or trunk identifier Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Select a a port or trunk enter a protocol group ID the corresponding VLAN ID and click Apply Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Interface Port 1 all C Trunk J Query Current New Group 1 VLAN 3 lt lt Add Protocol Group ID 1 2147483647 Remove VLAN ID 1 4094 Figure 3 8
406. passing through or the performance of the monitored port 4 182 Rate Limiting Controls the maximum trate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 184 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks 4 185 Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays current entries clears the table or sets the aging time 4 198 Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 204 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs 4 229 GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB 4 247 Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP 4 252 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies ports attached to a multicast router 4 267 IP Interface Configures the IP address and gateway for management access 4 278 DNS Configures DNS services 4 284 4 13 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The access mode shown in the follow
407. password super page 4 37 ENTERING COMMANDS To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the 8 10GE L2 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the 8 10GE L2 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 10 e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the com
408. per State Expired Admin State Defaulted Y Oper State gt Defaulted Admin State Distributing Y Oper State Distributing CS Admin State Collecting oA Oper State Collecting i go ERRETAN Y Oper State Synchronization Y Admin State Aggregation j i Oper State Aggregation E 7 Admin State Timeout jl Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity CA Figure 3 58 LACP Port Neighbors Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 4 194 Port channel 1 neighbors Eth 1 2 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity PORT CONFIGURATION Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can prot
409. peration mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dotlx operation mode single host multi host max count count no dotlx operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dotlx mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 105 e In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if 4 110 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS dotlx re authenticate This command forces
410. ping Enabled Filtering Querier Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled There are interoperability problems between F ow Control and Head of Line HOL blocking for the switch ASIC Flow Control is therefore not supported for this switch CHAPTER 2 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s ma
411. ported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 3 67 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 4 158 Example Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth write daily Console config show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and tead write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 164 Example SNMP COMMANDS Console show snmp group Group Name r amp d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Storage Type permanent Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 4 42 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Nam
412. pport Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Port IP Precedence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features In Band Management Telnet web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags TEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs A 2 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASES IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication TEEE 802 3 2002 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging ARP RFC 826 DHCP Client RFC 1541 HTTPS IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2c
413. pression at 6000 packets per second for port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 175 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if Hswitchport broadcast packet rate 6000 4 175 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 4 180 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast Threshold Enabled 6000 packets second LACP Status Enabled Ingress Rate Limit Disabled 10000M bits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 10000M bits per second VLAN Membership Mode Hybrid Ingress Rule Disabled Acceptable Frame Type All frames Native VLAN T Priority for Untagged Traffic 0 GVRP Status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 19 Forbidden VLAN Console 3 142 PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time i i laa analysis You can then attach a logic 5 AP A AT analyzer or RMON probe to the target ene Ge port and study the traffic crossing the port source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the soutce port Command
414. r Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenEtror The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 3 101 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Query
415. r Timer i Trunk Port PVID frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi Md Mode Member Seconds Seconds 500 20 1000 60 3000 48000 DOM ia gin AL TT Enabled M Enabled zo feo fro myona z ft AL Enabled M Enabled 20 60 foo Hybond 8 Tegged Enabled M Enabled 20 50 foo Hybrid y fi AL z Enabled enabled 20 foo fiooo myond fi ALL y FM Enabled IV Enabled 30 a0 2000 Hybrid z P fa y F Enabled I Enabled ko bo foo Hybrid Figure 3 79 VLAN Port Configuration 3 199 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Configuring Private VLANs Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 170 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 234 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 235 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 236 Console config if switchport gvrp 4 249 Console config if garp timer join 20 4 250 Console config if garp timer leave 90 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 233 Console config if Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note tha
416. r will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email eai address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None 4 69 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email 4 70 This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email emailaddress email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmai
417. ransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Port CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Port 1 y C Trunk z Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded o Recewed Unknown o Packets Packets Received Errors OlTransmit Octets 168087 i Transmit Multicast Transmit Unicast ibid a Packets B Siia Transmit Broadcast 47 Transmit Discarded o Packets Packets Transmit Errors 0 Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions o FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions 0 B Internal MAC Transmit Single Collision Frames Eirore 0 Multiple Collision Frames D Carrier Sense Errors D SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions rca MAG ReceWe D rors RMON Statistics Drop Events O Jabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames _47 65 127 Bytes Frames _ 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518
418. raps are used Timeout The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds Retry times The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 e Enable Authentication Traps Issues a notification message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a notification message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 6 These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View page 3 66 3 57 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click SNMP Configuration Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages specify the UDP port SNMP version trap security level for v3 clients trap inform settings for v2c v3 clients and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address 10 1 19 23 Trap Manager Community String private none T PP IR rap UDP Port 16 Trap
419. ration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address ofthe VLAN to which the management station is attached Note you can manage the switch through any configured IP interface Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The MAC address of this switch Restart DHCP Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server 3 21 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 22 Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static Enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN fs IP Address Mode Staic z IP Address oroz Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 10 1 0 254 MAC Address 00 0C DB 21 11 33 Restart DHCP
420. re allowed GC 4 39 management access show Displays the switch to be monitored or PE 4 40 management configured from a browser 4 38 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client szart address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Ifanyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges e When entering addresses for the same group 1 e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping
421. re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dotlx re authenticate nterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dot1ix re authenticate Console dotlx re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication for a specified port Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dotlx re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx re authentication Console config if 4 111 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dotlx timeout quiet period seconds no dotlx timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config ttinterface eth 1 2 Console config if Hdot1lx timeout quiet period 350 Console config 1f dotlx timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds no dotlx tim
422. re is more than one touter switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the setvice requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 3 223 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 224 Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Disabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Ra
423. re up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan tvlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan 4 231 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands show vlan 4 239 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 57 Configuring VLAN Interfaces default untagged frames Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for IC 4 232 a specified VLAN switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode IC 4 233 for an interface switchport Configures frame types to be accepted IC 4 234 acceptable frame types by an interface switchport Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 235 ingress filtering switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of IC 4 236 an interface switchport allowed Configures the VLANs associated with IC 4 237 vlan an interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 249 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANSs for an IC 4 238 vlan interface switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming IC 4 254 interface vlan 4 232 This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan v an id vlan id ID of the configu
424. red VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None VLAN COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config Htinterface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config 1f Related Commands shutdown 4 174 switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode e trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel 4 233 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchpor
425. rface ethernet 1 4 Console config 1f description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters 4 170 INTEREACE COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled29 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 10000full 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 10000full Forces 10 Gbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is Fast Ethernet port 100full 100 Mbps full duplex 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports 10000full 10 Gbps full duplex Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel
426. rfaces ip lacp line log logging mac mac address table management map marking port protocol vlan public key pvlan queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users version vlan Console show of possible show commands Access groups Access lists Bridge extension information Date and time information DNS information 802 1x content GARP properties GVRP interface information History information Host information Interface information IP information LACP statistics TTY line information Login records Login setting MAC access list Configuration of the address table Show management information Maps priority Configuration for packet marking Port characteristics Protocol VLAN information Public key information Private VLAN information Priority queue information RADIUS server information Information on the running configuration Simple Network Management Protocol statistics Simple Network Time Protocol configuration Spanning tree configuration Secure shell server connections Startup system configuration System information TACACS server settings Information about terminal lines System hardware and software versions Virtual LAN settings ENTERING COMMANDS The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters protocol
427. rompt Console reload Configuring the Secure Shell 3 84 The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and rep remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 clients USER AUTHENTICATION Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication s
428. roubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes BASIC CONFIGURATION System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled e Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level O to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Level Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release e RAM Le
429. s Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 153 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database 3 18 BASIC CONFIGURATION Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 184 Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PWID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP I Enable Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration 3 19 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 248 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLA
430. s vlan interfacej mac address MAC address e mask Bits to match in the address gt interface ethernet wnit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset 4 201 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface MAC Address VLAN Type Eth 1 1 00 e0 29 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time s
431. s should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 210 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority 1 e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the d
432. s how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config tinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if VLAN COMMANDS switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add v an ist tagged untagged remove v an list no switchport allowed vlan add v an ist List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default e The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames ate always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interfa
433. s server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 4 100 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 1 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console 4 101 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon tacacs 4 102 authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 30 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 102 tacacs ser
434. s the default engine ID If the local engineID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 60 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 80000034030030f1 b0e7s00000 Default Save Figure 3 26 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID 3 59 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 60 CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config Hsnmp server engine id local 12345abcdef 4 159 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 160 Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console Specifying a Remote Engine ID To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote
435. sed VLAN G N 2 1 9 3 4 aaa aa A a S E A E A T Fale 13 10 11 12 Goo A IM Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN awate devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID
436. separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLAN CONFIGURATION VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong
437. sers must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read and a write view To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 55 and Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 60 3 63 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 64 Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 60 Remote IP The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications us
438. set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 36 3 79 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence 1 e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local RADIUS Settings Global Serverlndex C1 C2 C3 C4 05 Server Port Number 1 65535 181 Secret Text String a Number of Server Transmits 1 30 IE Timeout for a reply 1 65535 10 sec TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 111213 Server Port Number 1 65535 fag Secret Text String Figure 3 33 Authentication Server Settings 3 80 USER AUTHENTICATION CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 95 Console config radius server port 181 4 99 Console config radius server key green 4 99 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 100 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 100 Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 4 98 Console config exit Console show radius server 4 101 Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number
439. sion Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Glossary 7 GLOSSARY Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP A protocol that uses a virtual IP address to support a primary router and multiple backup routers The backups can be configured to take over the workload if the master fails or to load share the traffic The primary goal of VRRP is to allow a host device which has been configured with a fixed gateway to maintain network connectivity in case the primary gateway goes down XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devi
440. sole config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Console config if 3 195 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 196 Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port 1 8 or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANSs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 10 VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 y C Trunk Query Member Non Member Vlan 1 Figure 3 78 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 170 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 237 Console config if switchport allowed vlan re
441. source email oooo oooooommm o 4 69 logging sendmail destination email oo oooo 4 70 logoe senda ee oh aa td oo sitet 4 71 show logging sendmail 00 4 71 Lime Commands pidas is tada 4 72 SMtp Clent ta a das S aks a 4 72 O 4 73 SP Pol A A a seid 4 74 SW A a eds ia she de 4 75 Clock timeZone cara hak alge hed o dd n 4 76 calendatisety dit ar A soar ae 4 77 show Calendats iio iad esos hes eee tae ee Big 4 77 xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS System Status Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 78 show startup config 2 0 cee eee 4 78 show running config 6 0 eee eee 4 81 SHOW SyStetns eras sisi O a Dido 4 83 SHOW USES it diate ba ae 4 84 SHOW Version ial St Avet mente dd eS a 4 84 Frame Size Commands 0 0 cee eee eee 4 85 JUDO rae int a lod titi 4 85 Flash File Commands 0 0 ccc cece cece eee eee e eens 4 86 COPY fy saga Mesut ad bi da dt a de di 4 87 delete aro 4 90 dE o o ls E yaaa ican 4 91 Whichb00t 24d sil 4 92 DOOE SYSTEM S e ii AS di dad LAI 4 93 Authentication Commands 00 4 94 Authentication Sequence 11 6 0 eee cece eee 4 94 authentication logih eesse rine eee eee 4 95 authentication enable 0 eee ee eee eee 4 96 RADIUS Elentir io se oh aad dca a 4 97 Padius serVerNOSt baie tuos WT le 4 98 tadius setver pOtt cra a E eee eee 4 99 tadius s t vet key weenie sx vest a Riga See dak 4 99 tadius server retransmit 0 eee eee ee
442. specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu then click Apply IP
443. specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect 4 17 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 16 password thresh 4 20 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 600 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration
444. ss 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console 4 89 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of configuration file or code image Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfe cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 91 delete public key 4 53 4 90 FLasH FiLE COMMANDS dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode filename y The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of configuration file or code image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files A colon is required after the specified unit number
445. ss to this port protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights When a client 1 e Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch 1 e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method must be MD5 TES TTLS and PEAP will be supported in future releases The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The USER AUTHENTICATION RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of dot1x on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified 802 1X must be enabled
446. ssages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config tlogging facility 19 Console config SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the syslog severity levels listed in the table on page 4 60 Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Default Setting e Disabled e Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved e Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config 4 63 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear log This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory 1 e permanent memoty e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Comman
447. st e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 120 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protocol number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dseh source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination preceden
448. st 4 141 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 145 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 out Console Related Commands mac access group 4 145 map access list mac 4 146 This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list mac ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule By default a packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below Table 4 37 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACLs Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if map access list mac M5 cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 256 show map access list mac 4 147 show map access list mac This command shows th
449. st Configures static multicast router ports 4 276 Routing 4 267 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 69 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 268 ip igmp snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a multicast GC 4 269 static group ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 269 version show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query PE 4 270 configuration show Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 271 mac address table multicast ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config 4 268 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan viun id static ip address interface vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 p address IP address for multicast group gt interface ethernet unit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Th
450. st Key Host Key Type Both F Save Host Key from Memory to Flash _Senerate Ciear Figure 3 35 SSH Host Key Settings USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 53 Console ip ssh save host key 4 55 Console show public key host 4 57 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739 6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368 4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511 729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaClkc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3 86 9j YVX1ME1SHLOEcE Re6hlasfEthIwmjhLY400j qJZpcEQUgC EYlLum0Y2uo0Lka Py9ieGWO8f2gobUZKIICu Kg6vj O9XTs7XKc05xfzkBiKviDa 20r1z6UK 6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo h5v8r0ea2r pnO06DkZAAAAFOCNZnx17dwpW8RrVDQnSWw4Q0k 60QAAATEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6 11TmrmSiJgfwO90qRPUMPbCAKCC uzxatO0o7drnlZypMx Sx5RUdMGgKS 9ywsalcWqH eFY5i1lc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIk zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn Q7IphPqyJ309MK8LFD mJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FgX7VGOEbzVDSOIRTMFy3iUxtvG yOAOVSy6 7M c3 1MtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxXgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5af 8TUAgPNWKV6W OhqmshQdot VzDR1e XKNTZj 0uTwWf jO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrb1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console Configuring the SSH Server The S
451. stics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Unit 1 y Mode Active 2 Ip E ir Down 8 10GE L2 Switch Manager System Name Object ID 136 141 202 20 47 ddress Table Location panning Tree Contact System Up Time D days 0 hours 3 minutes and 57 4 seconds Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical support PEEP connect to SMC Web sae Figure 3 1 Home Page 3 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuration Options 3 4 Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Apply Sets specified values to the system Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu To
452. switch file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit to file2 Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware 2 Stacking is not supported by this switch 3 25 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 66 99 ce 9D E See Source Destination Unit Stack unit Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted 3 26 BASIC CONFIGURATION Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software
453. switch Current Table Shows the current port members of each 3 190 VLAN and whether or not the port is tagged or untagged NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 192 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 194 Static Membership by Configures membership type for interfaces 3 196 Port including tagged untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN 3 197 attributes Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN 3 197 attributes Private VLAN Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 200 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 3 201 Protocol VLAN Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the 3 203 supported protocols Port Configuration Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 3 204 Priority 3 206 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 206 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 206 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output 3 208 queues Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not NA implemented Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or 3 209 Weighted Round Robin Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin 3 210 queueing IP Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP 3 213 DSCP Priorit
454. sword Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level eve 0 7 password no enable password level eve e level vel Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used e 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 e The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration 4 37 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 27 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 27 authentication enable 4 96 IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that a
455. t 23 Authentication login local RADIUS none Jumbo Frame Disabled POST Result DUMMY Test T aras idas de gio PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TESE 100 iaa PASS Timer Test wed cig ts Ge ete PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Done All Pass Console Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in ports e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board 3 16 BASIC CONFIGURATION Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software EPLD Version Version number of EEPROM Programmable Logic Device Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master i e stand alone These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI Unit ID Unit number in stack Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply Web Click System Switch Informatio
456. t Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec Transmission limit Path Cost Method Eth 1 7 information Admin status enabled Role master State forwardi External admin path cost 1000 Internal admin path cost 1000 External oper path cost 000 Internal oper path cost 000 Priority 28 Designated cost 0 Designated port 28 1 Designated root 32768 1 Designated bridge 32768 1 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to enabled Spanning Tree Status ng 0030F1D473A0 0030F1D473A0 point 3 179 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config Hspanning tree mst configuration 4 229 Console config mst imst 1 priority 4096 4 214 Console config mstp imst 1 vlan 1 5 4 213 Console config mst Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 168 Web
457. t acceptable frame types 4 234 switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if 4 234 VLAN COMMANDS Related Commands switchport mode 4 233 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly f
458. t as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default BASIC CONFIGURATION Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator e IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address ip address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type
459. t been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag If you cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time B 1 TROUBLESHOOTING Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Continued Symptom Action Cannot connect using Secure Shell If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station e Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key a
460. t channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 4 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 4 Broadcast Threshold Enabled 1042 packets second LACP Status Disabled Ingress Rate Limit Disabled 10000M bits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 10000M bits per second VLAN Membership Mode Hybrid Ingress Rule Disabled Acceptable Frame Type All frames Native VLAN BR Priority for Untagged Traffic 0 GVRP Status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Console 4 180 INTEREACE COMMANDS Table 4 45 show interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled threshold if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 175 LACP status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 188 Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 185 VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 233 Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 235 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only
461. t for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WPR z Figure 3 86 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 253 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 257 Queue mode strict Console Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 208 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each que
462. t of all deny tules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address e Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 The following restrictions apply to ACLs This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound 4 117 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL tule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit
463. t period 40 4 112 Console config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 5 4 112 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period 40 4 113 Console config if end 3 99 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Disable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 7 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 6 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 8 Console Console show dot1x 4 113 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized yes 1 2 enabled Single Host Auto yes 1 7 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 8 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 3 100 USER AUTHENTICATION Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 7 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticato
464. t priority the MST spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 225 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the PE 4 226 common spanning tree 1 e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree Shows the multiple spanning tree PE 4 229 mst configuration configuration spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled 4 205 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rs
465. t private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simu taneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN DQO gt Joo Enabling Private VLANs promiscuous ports Downlink Ports Secondary VLAN private ports Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function 3 200 VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled v Figure 3 80 Private VLAN Status CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 4 240 Console config Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 C G 2 C C G 3 a O C 4 e C C 5 C G C 6 C e C 7 O O G Figure 3 81 Private VLAN Link Status 3 201 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This configures port 3 as an uplink and port 5 and 6 as downl
466. t starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST VLANs configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST 3 159 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 160 Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric
467. tched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol Glossary 2 GLOSSARY IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Mul
468. te When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Note For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased 3 83 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Consolettcopy tftp https certificate 4 87 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type reload at the command p
469. te an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 15 Console config if ip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface 1 e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch config access list ip extended 6 Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config
470. terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud Auto Default Auto Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit BASIC CONFIGURATION Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 0 secs 0 Disabled ee A ru aa j Exec Timeout 0 65535 0 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 7 secs 0 Disabled Ti 1 Data Bits 8 Parity None Speed Auto F Stop Bits al Figure 3 14 Configuring the Console Port 4 CLI only 3 35 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI
471. ters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 General Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level
472. terval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 3 182 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Admin MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 By default the system automatic
473. the Switch s IP Address on page 3 20 Configuration Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down e Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice 9 Trunk Information only 3 122 PORT CONFIGURATION e Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 10Gfull Supports 10 Gbps full duplex operation Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled e Port security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses e Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Current status Link status Indicates if the link is up or down e Port operation status Provides
474. then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked 4 95 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 36 authentication enable 4 96 This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 27 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS e You can specify three authentication methods in a single
475. thentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP V3 View defaultview Group public read only private read write Port Admin Status Enabled Configuration Flow Control Disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled SYSTEM DEFAULTS Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled SS Broadcast Limit Rate 1042 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled MSTP Algorithm Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 15 Fast Forwarding Edge Disabled Port Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN il PVID T Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Hybrid tagged untagged frames Mode GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Ingress Port Priority 0 Prioritization M eighted Round Robin Queu 0 1234 5 6 7 Weight 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Port Priority Disabled 1 9 INTRODUCTION 1 10 Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default IP Settings Management VLAN Any VLAN configured with an IP address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled DNS BOOTP Disabled Multicast IGMP Snooping Snoo
476. ther rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 122 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny tules Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 107 Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15 DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 63 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Source Destination Port Bit Mask Decimal number repr
477. thernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Example Console config Htinterface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is unit 1 port Port number Range 1 8 port channel channe id Range 1 4 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 GVRP configuration Disabled Console 4 249 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall mer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Which timer to set timer_valne Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Port Channel Command Usage e Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP t
478. this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 271 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 2 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 2 IGMP Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 223 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group 3 229 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute e Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list WLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router
479. thout being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMP v3 construct for the default public community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 72 2 9 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 10 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings
480. ticast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Glossary 3 GLOSSARY Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the har
481. tings NE 4 75 PE clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal GC 4 76 clock calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 77 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE 4 77 PE sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 72 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup ie 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 e This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp server 4 73 sntp poll 4 74 show sntp 4 75 sntp server This com
482. tl Port8 Unitl Pong y Figure 3 75 VLAN Current Table Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes e Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members 3 191 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 239 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 8 Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Console Creating VLANs 3 192 Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not
483. to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes e Default Priority20 The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 20 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 206 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority 8 Port Default Priority 07 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 05160068 lid Figure 3 84 Default Port Priority CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config if end Information of Eth 1 5 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Egress rate limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Console Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 3
484. to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unawate devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 3 185 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unawate network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging A E tagged frames amp E VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware a tagged untagged a frames frames EMEY A VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways
485. to show that you ate using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty 1 gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode 1 e Normal Exec where indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the 8 10GE L2 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword e To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config e To enter commands that require parameters ent
486. tp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 15 Default Setting mstp Command Mode Global Configuration 4 206 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridg
487. trademarks of their respective holders LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Statement SMC Networks Inc SMC warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the applicable warranty term All SMC products carry a standard 90 day limited warranty from the date of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller SMC may at its own discretion repair or replace any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product during the applicable warranty term SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime warranty by registering new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller Registration can be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty The Limited Lifetime warranty covers a product during the Life of that Product which is defined as the period of time during which the product is an Active SMC product A product is considered to be Active while it is listed on the current SMC price list As new technologies emerge older technologies become obsolete and SMC will at its discretion replace an older product in its product line with one that incorporates these newer techno
488. ts ports A network management station can access this information using software such as SMC Elite View Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models with each model having it s own security levels There are three security models defined SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Users are assigned to SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL groups that are defined by a security model and specified security levels Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing which are known as views The switch has a default view all MIB objects and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings Table 3 4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Model Level Group Read Write Notify Security View View View v1 noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community read only string only v1 noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview
489. ty settings Console config map ip dscp 4 262 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if Hmap ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 263 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 266 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o o Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces 3 217 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority IP Port Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Global Status I Enabled Figure 3 91 IP Port Priority Status Click
490. ublic key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions USER AUTHENTICATION Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the preceding section Command Usage Field Attributes e Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537
491. uded from the SNMP view 3 72 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMPv3 Views Name OID Subtrees Actions E radaccess OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees F deXaultview OID Subtrees Edit OID Subrtrees in writ access View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees SNMPv3 Views view la View readaccess E SNMPv3 View Edit 01D Subtree Type 1 3 6 1 2 Included Back View Name Beck Current New ps REAT OID Subtree aa Type Included z Figure 3 31 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3 73 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries Console config Hsnmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included 4 161 Console config exit Console show snmp view 4 162 View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID
492. uding 3 14 contact information Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware 3 16 firmware version numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 18 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 20 Jumbo Frames Enables support for jumbo frames 3 24 File Management 3 25 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying files 3 25 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash 3 25 memoty Set Startup Sets the startup file 3 25 Line 3 33 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 33 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 36 Log 3 38 Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 38 System Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 43 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a 3 40 remote logging process Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Menu Description Page SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a 3 44 participating server Reset Restarts the switch 3 46 SNTP 3 47 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings includinga 3 47 specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 49 SNMP 3 50 Configuration Configures community strings and related 3 53 trap functions Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP 3 53 SNMPv3 3 58 Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID 3 59 Remote Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine
493. ue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes WRR Setting Table 2 Displays a list of weights for each traffic class L e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class 1 e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface G Port C Trunk E Select Traffic Class 0 weight BN Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 6 Traffic Class 4 weight8 Weight Value E 1 15 Figure 3 87 Queue Scheduling 22 CLI shows Queue ID 3 211 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 4 255 Console config if end Console show queue bandwidth 4 258 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 1 3 2 5 3 7 4 2 5 11 6 13 i 15 Information of Eth 1 2 Queue ID Weight Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 3 212 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be
494. uld try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 166 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 163 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Command Attributes e MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 WLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 The other global attributes are described
495. um of eight characters is required e priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption e priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password Default Setting None SNMP COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command e Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 4 159 to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail SNMP passwords ate localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config snmp server user steve r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user
496. unk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 170 Console config if lacp 4 170 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 177 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 10G Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A2 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex 10G full Capabilities Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by LACP Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 10G full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Console 3 131 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 132 Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 192 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed 1 e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4
497. unt Current status Created by Link status Member Ports Console Operation Speed duplex 10G 00 0C DB 21 11 34 Up 10G full Disabled 0 Lacp Up 10G full Eth1 6 Eth1 7 Eth1 8 4 189 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 1 8 Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config
498. up config lt stackingDB gt 00 lt stackingDB gt lt stackingMac gt 01_00 0c db 21 11 33 00 lt stackingMac gt phymap 00 0c db 21 11 33 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f 783edd 27d254ca VLAN database VLAN 1 media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface ethernet 1 9 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface VLAN 1 IP address 192 168 1 58 255 255 255 0 IP address DHCP no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP l line console line VTY end Console Related Commands show running config 4 81 4 80 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated b
499. up link ethernet 1 12 down link ethernet 1 5 8 Console config show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 4 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 4 241 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Configuring Protocol based VLANs 4 242 The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 60 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vlan Create a protocol group specifying the GC 4 243 protocol group supported protocols protocol vlan Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 244 protocol group show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol PE 4 245 protocol group groups s
500. upplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs oc0o0ooooo ooooo SNMP logging disabled Console SNMP COMMANDS snmp setver community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community s ring e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax sn
501. us server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 99 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout sumber_of_seconds no radiu
502. ust enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one samp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume mote system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 151 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 158 4 156 SNMP COMM
503. uthentication 3 76 Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols USER AUTHENTICATION Remote Authentication Dial in User Service ia RADIUS and Terminal Web Access Controller Access Telnet E console jas etela Control System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access RADIUS TACACS that use software running Serves on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By
504. uthentication is used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection e Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and 9600 bps e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact SMC Technical Support for help B 2 USING SYSTEM LOGS Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps 1 Enable logging 2 Set the error messages reported to include all categories 3 Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages 4 Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error 5 Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed 6 Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 B 3 TROUBLESHOOTING B 4 GLOSSARY Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2
505. uto Requires a dotlx awate client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x awate will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise This is the default setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled Max Request Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 3 97 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 98 Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authoriz
506. value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs
507. vel Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 7 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level 3 39 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 40 Web Click System Logs System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status Disabled Flash Level 0 7 Ram Level 0 7 Figure 3 16 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 59 Console config logging history ram 0 4 60 Console config exit Console show logging ram 4 64 Syslog logging Disabled History logging in RAM level emergencies Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level Command Attributes Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Disabled Logging F
508. vel 7 SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list 3 44 BASIC CONFIGURATION Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Web Click System Log SMTP Enable SMTP specify a source email address and select the minimum severity level To add an IP address to the SMTP Server List type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages and click Apply SMTP Admin Status Enabled Email Source Address pig wheels matel com Severity 4 Warming SMTP Server List New 192 168 1 4 lt lt Add 192 168 1 5 merar SMTP Server Remove l Email Destination Address List New lt lt Add Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 45 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message and specify the switch source an
509. ver Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server 4 50 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Consolettip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 53 show ssh 4 56 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config R
510. ver port Specifies the TACACS server network GC 4 103 port tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 103 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 104 server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 103 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console
511. vlan Protocol vlan information status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the TEE S keywords starting with Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Console sh s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands 4 7 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical coun
512. with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if 4 191 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE lacp admin key Port Channel 4 192 This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if Htlacp admin key 3 Console config 1f LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax
513. ws port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 132 access group map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 133 output queue for packets matching an ACL tule show map Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE 4 134 access list ip for an interface match access list Changes the 802 1p priority IP IC 4 135 ip Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 136 packet marking access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address e extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None 4 120 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new tules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list e To remove a tule use the no permit or no deny command
514. y 3 173 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 174 Admin Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet 200 20 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 10 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 1000 trunk 500 Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this optio
515. y command and corresponding commands This command displays the ey symbols and includes the configuration mode following information MAC address for the switch SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for management VLAN Layer 4 precedence settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 81 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show running config building running config please wait lt stackingDB gt 00 lt stackingDB gt lt stackingMac gt 01_00 0c db 21 11 33 00 lt stackingMac gt phymap 00 0c db 21 11 33 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 l snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1lf783eddf27d254ca VLAN database VLAN 1 media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface ethernet 1 9 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface VLAN 1 IP address 192 168 1
516. y Status Priority or disables both 3 11 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 12 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping 3 213 the precedence tag to a class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point 3 215 priority mapping a DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 217 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the 3 217 socket number and associated class of service value ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding 3 219 output queue for packets matching an ACL rule IGMP Snooping 3 221 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures 3 223 parameters for multicast query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a 3 226 Port Information neighboring multicast router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a 3 227 Port Configuration neighboring multicast router IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this 3 228 Table switch including multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Indicates multicast addresses associated 3 229 Port Table with the selected VLAN NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page DNS 3 231
517. ys the configuration data currently in PE 4 81 running config use show system Displays system information NE PE 4 83 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions NE PE 4 84 including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 84 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memoty that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memoty 4 78 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by command and corresponding commands This command displays the cy symbols and includes the configuration mode following information MAC address for the switch SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for management VLAN Layer 4 precedence settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 79 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show start

TigerSwitch 10G

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents